Sharp AR-M207, AR-M165, AR-M162 Parts & Service

CODE : 00ZARM207/A1E
AR-M162 AR-M165
DIGITAL COPIER
AR-M207 With the RSPF installed
MODEL
AR-M207 AR-M165 AR-M162
CONTENTS
[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 [ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 [ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 [ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . 4 - 1 [ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 [ 6 ] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 [ 7 ] SIMULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 [ 8 ] TROUBLE CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -1 [ 9 ] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 [11] KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 [12] FRASH ROM VERSION UP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice.
manuals4you.com
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL 1. Cautions on using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 2. Installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 3. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 [2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. Basic specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 2. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 3. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 3. Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 4. Display(base screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 5. Motor, solenoid, clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 6. Sensor, switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 7. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 8. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1. Installing conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 2. Removal of protective material and fixing screw . . . . . .5-1 3. Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 4. Removal and storage of fixing screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 5. Changing the paper size setting of a trey. . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 [6] ADJUSTMENTS 1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 2. Copier adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 [7] SIMULATIONS 1. Entering the simulation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 2. Canceling the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 3. List of simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 4. Contents of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
[8] TROUBLE CODE LIST 1. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 2. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 [9] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 2. Maintenance display system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 3. Note for replacement of consumable parts . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. High voltage section/Duplex transport section . . . . . . . 10-1 2. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 3. Fusing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 4. Paper exit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 5. MCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 6. Optical frame unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 7. LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 8. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport section. . . . . . 10-10 9. Manual multi paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 10. Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 11. Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 12. Process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 13. Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 [11] KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM 1. Custom setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 2. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [12] FLASH ROM VERSION UP PROCEDURE 1. Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 2. Driver Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 3. Download procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 4. Version confirming procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 2. Circuit descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 3. Actual wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
manuals4you.com
[1] GENERAL
1. Cautions on using
A. Warning
The fusing area is hot. Exercise care in this area when removing misfed paper.
2. Installation requirements
Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the machine is moved. 1. The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection. 2. Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. For the power supply requirements, see the name plate on the back of the main unit. Note: Connect the machine to a power outlet which is not used for other electric appliances. If a lighting fixture is connected to the same outlet, the light may flicker. 3. Do not install your machine in areas that are: damp, humid, or very dusty exposed to direct sunlight poorly ventilated subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. 4. Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
Fusing unit
Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.
8" (20 cm)
B. Cautions
Do not switch the machine rapidly on and off. After turning the machine off, wait 10 to 15 seconds before turning it back on. Place the machine on a firm, level surface. When the machine is not used for a long time, for example, during prolonged holidays, turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet. When moving the machine, be sure to turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet. Do not cover the machine with a dust cover, cloth or plastic film while the power is on. Doing so may prevent heat dissipation, damaging the machine. Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the machine. Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law. The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national law. Other items may be prohibited by local law. Money, Stamps, Bonds, Stocks Bank drafts, Checks, Passports, Drivers licenses Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty prints. Store spare toner cartridges in a cool dry place without removing from the package before use. If they are exposed to direct sunlight or excessive heat, poor copies may result.
8" (20 cm)
8" (20 cm)
AR-M207 M165 M162 GENERAL 1-1
3. Configuration
A. System Configurations
Job separator (AR-TR4)
RSPF(AR-RP6N) SPF(AR-SP6N)
Network Box (AR-NB3)
AR-M207
With the RSPF installed
AR-M165 AR-M162
2 X 250 sheet paper feed unit (AR-D25)
250 sheet paper feed unit (AR-D24)
MODEL OPTION AR-RP6N AR-SP6N AR-VR5 AR-D24 AR-D25 AR-TR4 AR-EB9 REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER SINGLE PASS FEEDER DOCUMENT COVER 250-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT 2 x 250-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT JOB SEPARATOR TRAY KIT DUAL FUNCTION BOARD
AR-M207 OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT STD*1
AR-M165 OPT OPT STD OPT OPT OPT STD
AR-M162 NO OPT STD OPT OPT OPT STD*1
Remark
*1 Option for USA,CANADA.
AR-NB3 AR-FX11 AR-SM5 AR-MM9 AR-PF1 AR-PK1N AR-PF2
NETWORK PRINTING / SCANNING EXPANSION KIT FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT EXPANSION MEMORY FAX EXPANSION MEMORY BARCODE-FONT KIT PS3 KIT FLASH MEMORY KIT
OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
The AR-NB3 is required The AR-NB3 is required The AR-NB3 is required
AR-M207 M165 M162 GENERAL 1-2
manuals4you.com
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic Specification
A. Base Engine
(1) Type
AR-M207, AR-M162 / M165 Desk-top
(6) Job Speed

AR-M207 S S D S D D 20 Sheets/min(100%) 9 Sheets/min(45%) 8 Sheets/min(40%) AR-M162 / M165 16 Sheets/min(100%)
(2) Engine speed

Paper size A4/8.5" x 11" A4R/8.5" x 11"R A5/5.5" x 8.5" B5/16K B5R/16KR 8.5" x 13" B4/8.5" x 14 A3/11" x 17"/8K AR-M207 20ppm 14/15ppm 20ppm 20ppm 16/15ppm 12ppm 12ppm 11/10/11ppm AR-M162 / M165 16ppm 12ppm 16ppm 16ppm 14ppm 11ppm 10ppm 9/9/10ppm
*S S(from No. 1 cassette): 10 sheets of A4/8.5" x 11" document, 5 copies *S D(from No. 1 cassette): 10 sheets of A4/8.5" x 11" document, 5 copies *D D(from No. 1 cassette): 10 sheets of A4/8.5" x 11" document(20 surfaces), 5 copies
(7) Continuous copying

Max. number of multi copy 1-999copies(Can be changed to 1-99 in key operator programs)
(8) Engine composition

Photoconductor type Photoconductor drum dia. Process cleaning Copy lamp Charging system Transfer system Fusing system Process speed OPC(Organic Photo Conductor) 30mm Blade Cold cathode fluorescent lamp(CCFL) Saw teeth charging (+)DC scorotron Heat roller 88mm/s
(3) Print performance

AR-M207 GDI Print* SPLC Print 12ppm 20ppm(ROPM) AR-M162 / M165 12ppm 16ppm(ROPM)
* GDI print measurement conditions: Host PC/CPU = 500 700MHz or above, Windows 98SE, Data = TestChart-B1.doc, USB1.1, when supporting A4/Letter. Measurement method: With setting to 11, from completion of the first paper exit to completion of the 11th paper exit
Developing system Dry 2-component magnetic brush development
Separation system (-)DC scorotron
(4) Copy speed(cpm)

AR-M207 Normal A4/8.5"x11" A4R/ 8.5"x11"R B5/16K B5R/16KR 8.5x13" B4/8.5"x14 A3/11"x17"/ 8K 20 14/15 20 14/15 20 20 16/15 12 12 11/10/ 11 20 14/15 20 20 16/15 12 12 11/10/ 11 AR-M162 / M165 Reduction Enlargement 16 12 16 16 14 10 10 9/9/10 16 12 16 16 14 10 10 9/9/10 16 12 16 16 14 10 10 9/9/10 Reduction Enlargement Normal
(9) Engine resolution

Resolution Gradation Reading: 600 x 300dpi1(600 x 600dpi selectable) Writing: 600x600dpi Reading: 256 gradation, Writing: 2 gradations
A5/5.5"x8.5" 20 20 16/15 12 12 11/10/ 11
(10)Scanner section
Scanner(Document table)
(5) First copy time

First copy time 7.2sec or less
* Measurement conditions: When feeding paper of A4/8.5" x 11" from the main unit tray, polygon rotation state Main unit first stage Main unit second stage 7.2sec or less 8.5sec or less
Option paper feed 9.5sec or less first stage Option paper feed 10.5sec or less second stage Manual tray 7.5sec or less
First copy time from the document feed unit SPF RSPF 12sec or less 12sec or less
manuals4you
.com
AR-M207 M165 M162 SPECIFICATIONS 2-1
(11) Document table

Max. Document size Scan area A3/11"x17" 297 x 431mm
(13) Operation panel

a. Display device Type System Display dot number LCD drive display area LCD brightness adjustment Type b. Key Mode selection area Copy mode key(mode LED) Print mode key(mode LED/ONLINE LED/DATA LED) Scanner mode key(mode LED) Fax mode key(mode LED/LINE LED/DATA LED) LCD display with backlight FSTN 119 x 73 dots 78.867 x 41.653 mm Available 7 segment LED(x 3)
Document Left back corner reference reference position Detection(Platen) Detection size Available Automatic detection(supported by each unit for inch/AB) AB system: Inch system: OR guide display Left back corner (Print display) Left side document guide A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R Document reference position (From the back) [Postal card] [A6 ] [B6 ] [5-1/2] [A5 ] [B5 ] [A4/A5 ] [8-1/2] [B4/B5 ] [11] [A3/A4 ] (From the left) [5-1/2] [A5] [B5] [A4/ A5 ] [8-1/2] [B5 ] [11] [A4 ] [13] [14] [B4 ] [A3 ] [17] B5(Vertical), A4(Vertical), bookmark at 8" - 1/2" position(From the left)
Left side document guide
Back side document guide(Bookmark)
Basic input section Start key/LED Numeric keys * AUDIT CLEAR key # Read End key Clear/Stop key Interrupt key All Clear key LCD display section Exposure key(Color mode/Program) Paper key(Resolution/Program) Zoom key(Address) Auto% key(Format/Broadcast) Duplex key(Duplex scan) Sort(Document size) Special function key Fax status key Arrows key OK key Back key LINE STATUS indicator (when the fax option is installed) English(Factory setting) For the languages other than English, the key sheet is packed together with the machine or manual kit. Attach it when installing.
AB and inch can be switched to each other by Sim.
(12) SPF/RSPF
Type Scan speed SPF/RSPF Single surface Single/Duplex automatic document feeder unit When copying: 20-sheet model/20 sheets/min 16-sheet model/16 sheets/min When FAX: 23 sheets/min Panel language support
Document Center reference position Document size Document weight Document load capacity Inhibited kinds of documents Detection Detection size * AB system: A3-A5 Inch system: 11" x17" - 5.5" x 8.5" 56 - 90g/m(15 - 24lbs) when duplex: 56 - 90g/m(15 - 24lbs) 40 sheets(30 sheets of 90g/m loadable)(30 sheets for B4/8.5" x 13" or above)40 sheets of 4mm thickness or below loadable Transparency film, Perforated sheets, photo, catalogue Avaiable Automatic detection(A kind of detection unit is used by switching the software destination.) AB system: Inch system: Document tray guide display Tray center(Marked) Document guide(Marked) A3,B4,A4,A4R,B5,B5R,A5 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5" Document insertion direction document face-up set command (From the center) A3/A4, 11", B4/B5, 8.5", A4R/A5, B5R, A5R, 5.5"
c. Characters used in LCD Kind Dot ROM font 6(W)x 12(H)
(14) Controller board

CPU Memory H8S2321(16bit 1-chip microprocessor, 19.6608MHz) 16MB(Single surface model) 32MB(Duplex surface model)
Interface IEEE1284 Parallel 1 port USB1.1 USB2.0 Ethernet 1 port 1 port(Standard/option area) 1 port(Network box)
(15) Paper feed section

Type 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed Paper feed system Front loading, paper feed from the top
manuals4you.com
Main unit tray Size to be fed A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5(No.1 tray only) 16K, 16KR, 8K, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5"(No. 1 tray only) User setting A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5" (For A5/5.5" x 8.5", however, No. 1 cassette only) AB system: A4 Inch system: 8.5" x 11"
(18) Paper exit section

Paper exit position/system Face down
Paper exit section 250 sheets capacity Paper exit paper size/kind Paper exit paper full detection All feedable paper types and sizes Upper stage: Available(Detected when the job separator is installed) Lower stage: None *250 sheets of counted and detected.
Paper size setting Paper size setting
Paper size setting when shipping
Kind and weight of Standard paper 56 - 90g/m applicable paper Paper feed capacity Paper type Remaining quantity detection Standard paper 250 sheets(64g/m) Standard paper, Recycled paper Only empty detection available
(19) Exposure(Print density)

Density mode NO. Of manual adjustment Toner save mode Auto/Text/Photo 5 steps(Text/Photo) Available(Default OFF with the service simulation)
(20) Void width

Void area Image loss Lead edge: 1 - 4mm, rear edge: 4mm or less, both sides: 6mm 4mm or less
(16) Manual paper feed section

Manual paper feed Foldable manual paper feed tray form Paper size A3 - A6, 11" x 17" - 8.5" x 11"
* For void area/image loss, normal/single copy. * For the first sheet of manual paper feed, the rear edge void is disable.
Manual paper feed A3/A4, B4/B5, A4R/A5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R guide display Kind and weight of Standard paper applicable paper Thick paper(56 - 200g/m) Recycled paper, Envelope, Transparency film, Labels Paper capacity Standard paper Envelope Other Paper kind 100 Sheets (Standard paper: 56 - 80g/m)(Multi paper feed: 56 -128g/m) AB system: 10 Sheets Inch system: 5 Sheets Single paper feed(Transparency film, Labels, Postal card)
(21) Warm-up
Warm-up time Pre heat 45sec or less Available
Jam recovery time 45sec or less Left for 60 sec after door open. Standard condition, polygon stop
(22) Copy magnification ratio

Fixed AB system: 25, 50, 70, 81, 86, 100, 115, 122, 141, magnification ratio 200, 400% Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 77, 95, 100, 121, 129, 141, 200, 400% Zooming Independent zooming 25-400%(SPF/RSPF: 50-200%) Vertical/horizontal: 25-400% (SPF/RSPF: 50-200%)
AB system: Standard paper/Recycled paper/ Transparency film/Labels/Postal card/Envelope/ Thick paper(-200g/m) Inch system: Standard paper/Recycled paper/ Transparency film/Labels/Postal card/Envelope/ Thick paper(-200g/m) None Available
(23) Power source

Voltage Frequency Power switch 100V, 110V, 120V, 127V, 230V(200V), 240V 50/60Hz One power source
Paper size detection Paper empty detection
(24) Power consumption

Max. Power consumption 1200W 550W
(17) Duplex
Standard Type Paper size 20-sheet model: Standard provision 16-sheet model: Not available Switchback system A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R
Power consumption in operation
Power 10W consumption when standby * Must conform to energy saving laws, international standards, and company regulations.
Kind and weight of Standard paper: 56 - 90 g/m/15 - 24lbs Bond applicable paper
(25) Environment support

Support program International Energy-Star Nordic swan Canadian environment selection program Blue angel eco-label Green purchase network Green purchase law Energy-saving law Green products
(31) Printer basics

GDI/SPLC Print Print speed GDI: 12PPM(GDI Print, USB2.0(Full speed), A4/ Letter) Measurement conditions: Host PC/CPU: 500 700MHz, RAM: 256MB or above, Windows98SE Data Testchart-B1, dot SPLC: According to the main machine speed. 7.2sec or less 600dpi Available Installed to the main unit paper exit section. Shit amount: 1 inch(25.4mm)journalizing according to every print job. Windows95/98/Me/NT4.0(Workstation SP5 or later)/2000(Professional)/XP(Home/Professional) GDI SPLC(JBIG-GDI): When the Dual function board (AR-EB9) is installed (Standard or option). IEEE1284(ECP Compatible) , USB1.1 USB2.0(When the Dual function board (AR-EB9) is installed (Standard or option). Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP Status Window When the Dual function board (AR-EB9) is installed (Standard or option). Yes(XP/2000) after a few month later from first lot.
First Print Resolution Duplex print Shifter
(26) Noises
Noise level Must conform to SS, blue angel, Nordic swan.
(27) Ozone & dust

Regulated value Ozone: 0.02mg/m or less Dust: 0.075mg/m or less Styrene: 0.07mg/m or less
Paper feed system Paper feed tray and multi paper feed
Supported OS Emulation
(28) External dimensions

1-stage cassette model(floor surface - glass surface) 1-stage cassette model(floor surface - OC) 1-stage cassette model(floor surface - SPF) 2-stage cassette model(floor surface - glass surface) 2-stage cassette model(floor surface - OC) 2-stage cassette model(floor surface - SPF) 3-stage cassette model(floor surface - glass surface) 3-stage cassette model(floor surface - OC) 3-stage cassette model(floor surface - SPF) 4-stage cassette model(floor surface - glass surface) 4-stage cassette model(floor surface - OC) 4-stage cassette model(floor surface - SPF) 590(W) x 595(D) x 435(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 469(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 568(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 520(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 554(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 652(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 605(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 640(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 738(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 690(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 725(H) 590(W) x 595(D) x 823(H)
Interface
PnP Support Software ROPM WHQL
(32) Scanner basics

Type Scan system Light source Resolution Document Effective scan range Scan speed Input data Output data Scan color Flat bed color scanner Document table/document feed unit White CCFL Basic 600 x 600 dpi Set range: 50 - 9600dpi Sheet/Book OC/SPF/RSPF: about 297(length)x 431(width)mm 2.88msec/Line(Color) 1bit or 12bit 1bit or 8bit Black and white binary/Gray scale/Full color TWAIN/WIA(XP Only)/STI USB1.1 USB2.0 Sharpdesk Provided Destination selection by LCD Available Windows98/Me/2000(Professional)/XP(Home/ Professional) Lead edge/rear edge: 2.5mm Side Left/right: 3.0mm Yes(XP/2000) after a few month later from first lot.
(29) Occupying area

Main unit only (excluding the handle) 590(W) x 595(D)
Protocol Interface Scanner utility
Main unit(Multi manual feed open) 880(W) x 595(D)
(30) Weight
20-sheet model (Electronic sort : Standard) 20-sheet model (Electronic sort : Option) 16-sheet model (Electronic sort/Duplex) 16-sheet model (Electronic sort : Standard) 16-sheet model (Electronic sort : Option) 34.2 (Kg) 33.8 (Kg) 30.6 (Kg)
Drop-out color Scanner button Duplex scan Supported OS Void area
30.0 (Kg) WHQL 29.7 (Kg)
manuals4you.com
(33) Network box basics

Standard memory 64MB Expansion memory Interface LED Switch Supported OS 1DIMM 1 slot 144pin 128/256MB SO-DIMM RJ45, USB port(for connection with the main unit) Power LED, 10/100BASE-Tx mode LED, LAN status LED, USB status LED Status Switch Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0(Workstation SP5 or later)/2000 professional/XP Home Edition/XP Professional Edition/Windows Sever 2003 Mac OS 8.6 - 9.2.2, 10.1.5, 10.2 - 10.2.8 (excluding 10.2.2), 10.3 - 10.3.4 (when PS option) Internet Explorer 5.5 or later, Netscape Navigator 6 or later PS expansion kit(AR-PK1N) Barcode font kit(AR-PF1) Flash ROM kit(AR-PF2) Sharpdesk(Sharp desk license kit AR-U series) TCP/IP IPX/SPX(NetWare), NetBEUI, , Ether Talk(Apple Talk) PCL/PS(PS is cancelled by the soft key.) ESC/P Font Kanji: Mincho, Gothic(Bitmap) ANK: Roman, Sans Serif(Bitmap) Canceled by the soft key.
Reliability(MCBJ/ MCBF) Document replacement speed(Standard copy) Item included Case color Installation
Conforms to the main unit. S-S S-D D-D Frosty white Must be installed easily. 16-sheet model: 100% 20-sheet model: 100% 20-sheet model: 45%(9 sheets/min) -
Installation manual
(2) Reversing single pass feeder(RSPF)

Document set Face up Document Right side center reference position Document transport system Document feed direction Document size Document weight Document set quantity Sheet through type Document feed from the top AB system: A3 - A5 Inch system: 11" x 17" - 5.5"x8.5" 56 - 90g/m(15 - 24lbs) Duplex: 56 - 90g/m(15 - 24lbs) 40 sheets(40 sheets of 4mm thickness or less can be loaded.) (30 sheets of 90g/m can be loaded. 30 sheets for B4 or 8.5" x 13" or above.) 583 mm(W) x 435 mm(D) x 133 mm(H) 5.4kg Supplied from the machine(Power consumption: 26.4W) On the document feed trey AB system A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Setting software Expansion option
Network protocol Emulation
E-RIC
B. Peripheral devices basic specifications

(1) Single pass feeder(SPF)
Document set Face up Document Right side center reference position Document transport system Document feed direction Document size Document weight Document set quantity Sheet through type Document feed from the top AB system: A3 - A5 Inch system: 11" x 17" - 5.5" x 8.5" 56 - 90g/m(15 - 24lbs) 40 sheets(40 sheets of 4mm thickness or less can be loaded.) (30 sheets of 90g/m can be loaded. 30 sheets for B4 or 8.5" x 13" or above.) 583 mm(W) x 435 mm(D) x 133 mm(H) 5.0kg Supplied from the machine(Power consumption: 21W) On the document feed trey AB system A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
External dimensions Weight Power Document size detection Detection size
Inch system 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5" Guide display Documents out of specifications Multi copy Random paper feed Document reversion Display section(LED) Reliability(MCBJ/ MCBF) Document replacement speed(Standard copy) Item included Case color Installation (From the center) A3/A4, 11", B4/B5, 8.5", A4R/A5, B5R, A5R, 5.5" Transparency film, Perforated document, photo, catalogue S-S, S-D, D-D, D-S(Duplex model) Not available Available(Not available for 5.5" x 8.5" and 5.5" x 8.5"R) None Conforms to the main unit S-S S-D D-D Frosty white Must be installed easily 16-sheet model: 100% 20-sheet model: 100% 20-sheet model: 45%(9 sheets/min) 20-sheet model: 40%(8 sheets/min)
Document mixture Not available
External dimensions Weight Power Document size detection Detection size
Inch system 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5" Guide display Documents out of specifications Multi copy Random paper feed Document reversion Display section(LED) (From the center) A3/A4, 11", B4/B5, 8.5", A4R/A5, B5R, A5R, 5.5" Transparency film/Perforated document, photo, catalogue S-S, S-D(Duplex model) Not available Not available None
Installation manual
Document mixture Not available
(3) 1-stage paper feed unit

Paper feed capacity Paper size detection Paper empty detection Paper size Paper weight Factory setting size Size selection Cassette installation/ removal Power External dimensions Weight Reliability(MCBJ/ MCBF) Item included Case color 250 Sheets Not available(The paper size can be set with the function menu.) Available A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 16K, 16KR, 8K 56 - 90g/m(15 - 24lbs) AB system: A4 Inch system: 8.5" x 11" A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R Can be made by the user
(6) Original cover(OC)

Function Item included Up/down open/close mechanism Installation manual
(7) 256MB expansion memory

Memory Item included 256MB Installation manual
(8) Job separator

Installation conditions Bin number Distribution system Paper size Paper weight Paper exit section capacity Paper exit job Paper exit full detection Power Item included Case color Installation Install when the printer or the FAX is expanded. Performs paper exit for every job 1 bin Controlled by the main unit. Conforms to the main unit paper feed paper. Conforms to the main unit paper feed paper. Upper stage: 100 Sheets Lower stage: 150 Sheets Upper stage: FAX output or printer output Lower stage: Copy output or printer output Upper stage: Available Lower stage: YES (Full detection by the counter) None Installation manual Frosty white Must be installed easily
Supplied from the machine(Power consumption: 5.6W) 590 mm(W) x 471 mm(D) x 88mm(H) 5.0Kg Conforms to the main unit Installation manual, Paper size label Frosty white
(4) 2-stage paper feed unit

Paper feed capacity Paper size detection Paper empty detection Paper size Paper weight Factory setting size Size selection 250 Sheets x 2 Not available(The paper size can be set with the function menu.) Available A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 16K, 16KR, 8K 56 - 90g/m(15 - 24lbs) AB system: A4 Inch system: 8.5" x 11" A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R Can be made by the user
(9) Network box

Function Power External dimensions Item included Supports the network printer(PCL/PS)and the network scanner. Supplied from the machine (Power consumption: 5.5W) 248 mm(W) x 127 mm(D) x 59 mm(H) USB2.0code x 1 Software CD(Driver/Network setting/application) Installation manual
(10) Facsimile expansion kit

Function Item included FAX expansion option One-touch dial key, destination label, installation manual
Cassette installation/ removal Power External dimensions Weight Reliability(MCBJ/ MCBF) Item included Case color
(11) Barcode font kit

Same as the AR-PF1.
Supplied from the machine(Power consumption: 8.4W) 590 mm(W) x 471 mm(D) x 174 mm(H) 10.0Kg Conforms to the main unit Installation manual, Paper size label Frosty white
(12) Flash memory kit

Same as the AR-PF2.
(13) PS3 expansion kit

Same as the AR-PK1N.
(14) Facsimile expansion memory

Same as the AR-MM9.
(5) Dual function board

Expansion function Electronic sort function, 2In1/4In1, Rotation copy, Edge erase/Center erase, Margin shift, Card shot USB2.0(High-speed support),SPLC print(JBIGGDI), ROPM function JBIG 16MB A4 standard document(Test chart B)100 sheets DIMM Memory slot x 1 Max. 256MB x 1slot + 16MB(Max 272MB in total) (Externally described as max. 256MB x 1) Installation manual,
Electronic sort compress function Memory for electronic sort Electronic sort scan quantity Memory expansion Item included
manuals4you.com
C. Various functions specifications

(1) Copy function specification
Function/ Automatic paper Yes Special function selection Automatic magnification ration selection Auto tray switching Memory copy Rotation copy Electronic sort Rotation sort X Y zoom Dual page copy Sort function Yes
(2) Printer function specification

a. GDI/SPLC Printer <Summary> Platform Supported OS IBM PC/AT(Include compatible machine) IEEE1284 Windows95/98/Me/ NT4.0(Workstation SP5)/ 2000(Professional)/XP(Home/ Professional) Windows98/Me/ 2000(Professional)/XP(Home/ Professional) Windows2000(Professional)/ XP(Home/Professional)
Yes USB1.1 Yes Yes (When electronic sort) Yes (Standard or option) No Yes Yes (Enlargement invalid/SPF invalid(Patent rotation) Yes (Standard or option) 100 sheets of A4 standard document (Test Chart B)are sorted. Yes (When electronic sort) Default AB system: 10mm(5, 10, 15, 20mm) Inch system: 1/2 Inch(1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Inch) Yes (When electronic sort) Default AB system: 10mm(5, 10, 15, 20mm)Inch system: 1/2 Inch(1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Inch) Yes (When electronic sort) Default AB system: 10mm(5, 10, 15, 20mm) Inch system: 1/2 Inch(1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Inch) No Yes (When electronic sort) Yes (Offset function) Yes (When electronic sort) Yes (Set by the key operator program.) Yes (Set by the key operator program.) Yes Yes (Standard provision for the model of 20-sheet model only) Yes (Set according to the destination) (No setting. * Default OFF with the service simulation.) Yes (Copy/printer/scanner: 50 Dept, Fax 50 dept) Duplex Emulation Memory GDI/JBIG GDI USB2.0
Environments for full operations of the above OS
<GDI/SPLC Printer function> Only the summary is described on this item. Function Main Copies Collate 1-999 Collate Uncollate Content Makes prints of the set number of copies. When this item is set to "Collate," prints of two or more copies are collated. When set to "Uncollated," two or more copies of each page are printed(uncollated).
Margin shift
Edge erase
Document Style
Center erase
1-sided Single face or double face 2-sided(Book) print is made according to 2-sided(Tablet) the setting. When set to duplex, the printing direction differs depending on book or tablet. 2/4 Z Yes/No Border lines are printed between pages printed on one sheet. The set pages are printed on one sheet.
N-up *1 N-up Order N-up Border
Black/white reverse 2in1/4in1 Sorter Card shot Preheating Auto shut-off Total counter Duplex Toner save
1-sided 2-sided(Book) 2-sided(Tablet) A3/B4/A4/B5/ A5/A6/B6/ Ledger/Legal/ Foolscap/ Folio/Letter/ Invoice/ Executive/8K/ 16K/COM-10/ DL/C5/ Custom/Postal card Print is made in the set paper size. Even when the actual paper size differs from the set paper size, images are formed printed in the set paper size.
Paper
Paper Size
Department management
Custom Paper 1 size Size *2 Fit to Page Yes/No
Width: 100 - 297mm Length: 148-431.8mm The print size is changed according to the set content. Printing is made in the set direction. Paper is fed from the set paper feed tray. Data are rotated 180 degrees and printed.
Image Orientation Paper Selection Rotate 180 Degree
Portrait Landscape Auto Bypass Tray 1/2(3/4) Yes/No
Function Paper Output Tray Selection Upper Tray Center Tray
Content When the job separator is installed, selection is made between the upper stage and the center stage of the paper exit tray. Draft/Normal (only for Windows 9x, Me) Contrast and brightness of images are adjusted. For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP , enable only for the Photo mode of Print Quality. The image brightness is adjusted by moving the scale from 0 to 100. The illustration image on the left upper corner of the display is changed. The image contrast is adjusted by moving the scale from 0 to 100. The illustration image on the left upper corner of the display is changed. A document made by a CAD program is printed in black to provide clear print of color line images and texts.
(3) Scanner function Specification

a. PUSH Scan(USB) Supported OS Hardware environment Win98/Me/2000/XP (System)Must meet the operating conditions of each OS. (HDD)8MB or above: 100MB or above recommendable (Monitor)800 x 600 dots or above, 256 colors or more must be displayed. (Other)USB port(1.1 or 2.0) SharpDesk/E-mail software/Fax software/OCR software/MS Word
Advanced Print Quality
Draft Normal Photo Yes/No
Image Adjustment
Selectable destination
b. PULL Scan(TWAIN) USB TWAIN Supported OS Hardware environment Win98/Me/2000/XP (System)Must meet the operating conditions of each OS. (HDD)8MB or above: 100MB or above recommendable (Monitor)800 x 600 dots or above, 256 colors or more must be displayed. (Other)USB port Duplex scan Color mode Resolution Yes Black and white(Simple binary)/Black and white(Error diffusion)/Gray scale/Full color Pull: 600 x 600dpi Emulation: 50-9600dpi Custom: 50-9600dpi Yes Yes Yes (90 degrees/180 degrees/270 degrees) Auto/Manual(-100 - +100)
Brightness
0 - 100%
Contrast
0 - 100%
Pured Black print
Yes/No
Watermarks
Watermarks
None/TOP SECRET/ CONFIDENTI AL/DRAFT/ ORIGINAL/ COPY Add/Update/ Delete Center X: 50 Y : 50 6 - 300 90 0 - 255 Yes
Preview function Zoom preview function Rotation scan Brightness/ contrast adjustment Gamma adjustment Color matching Edge emphasis Black/white reverse Light source selection Threshold value setting
User Setting Position
Yes None/Printer/CRT/LCD display/ICM None/Normal/Strong/Blur Yes Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White) Auto/Manual(1 - 254)
Size Angle Grayscale Edit Font
On First Page Yes/No only
Void area addition Available(Top/End edge = 2.5mm /Left/Right = 3.0mm) Set contents save Yes c. Network Push scan(When the network box is installed) Selectable destination Destination selection method Scan to E-mail/FTP/Desktop Address book LDAP retrieval/selection Ad-Hoc(10-key input)
manuals4you.com
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply system table
A. USA / CANADA
NO 1 Name Toner cartridge(Black) <With IC> Developer Drum kit Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 537g) Vinyl bag Developer (Developer : Net Weight 400g) Drum Drum fixing plate x10 x10 x10 x1 x1 500K 50K AR-202MD AR-202DR Life 160K Product name AR-202MT Remark Life setting by A4 6% document
2 3
B. Europe / Australia / New Zealand

NO 1 Name Toner cartridge(Black) <With IC> Developer Drum kit Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 537g) Vinyl bag Developer (Developer : Net Weight 400g) Drum Drum fixing plate x10 x10 x10 x1 x1 500K 50K AR-202LD AR-202DM Life 160K Product name AR-202LT Remark Life setting by A4 6% document
2 3
AR-M207 M165 M162 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3-1
2. Environmental conditions
A. Transport conditions
(1) Transport conditions
3. Production number identification

<Toner cartridge> The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.
Humidity (%)
Production place
Serial number
Year/ Month/ Day
Ver.No.
Temperature
(2) Storage conditions
Humidity (%)
<Drum cartridge> The lot number, printed on the front side flange, is composed of 6 digits, each digit showing the following content: 1 1 2 3 2 Alphabet Indicates the model conformity code. A for this model. Number Indicates the end digit of the production year. Number or X, Y, Z Indicates the month of packing. X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 4/5 6 Number Indicates the day of the month of packing. Alphabet Indicates the production factory. "A" for Nara Plant, C for SOCC 3 4 5 6
Temperature
B. Use conditions
Humidity (%)
Use environment conditions
Temperature
C. Life(packed conditions)
Photoconductor drum (36 months from the production month) Developer, toner (24 months from the production month)
AR-M207 M165 M162 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3-2
manuals4you.com
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Appearance
5 10 1 2 3 6 7 8 12 7 16 17 9 11 15
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 USB 2.0 port (USB-2) (when the dual function board is installed) USB 1.1 port (USB-1) Parallel port Charger cleaner Glass cleaner Document glass Handles Power switch Center tray
13
18 19
20
Connect to your computer to this port to use the printer and scanner functions. Connect to your computer to this port to use the printer and scanner functions. Connect to your computer to this port to use the printer function. Use to clean the transfer charger. Use to clean the original scanning glass. Place an original that you wish to scan face down here. Use to move the machine. Press to turn the machine power on and off. Copies and printed pages are output to this tray.
Upper tray (when the job separator tray kit is installed) Received faxes (when the fax option is installed) and print jobs are delivered to this tray. Operation panel Front cover Tray 1 Tray 2 Document cover (when installed) Side cover Side cover handle Bypass tray guides Bypass tray Bypass tray extension Contains operation keys and indicator lights. Open to remove paper misfeeds or replace the toner cartridge. Tray 1 can hold approximately 250 sheets of copy paper (64 g/m). Tray 2 can hold approximately 250 sheets of copy paper (64 g/m). Open to make a copy from the document glass. Open to remove misfed paper. Pull to open the side cover. Adjust to the width of the paper when using the bypass tray. Special paper (heavy paper or transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray. Pull out when feeding large paper such as 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" (A3 and B4).
AR-M207 M165 M162 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4-1
2. Internal
23 24
25
26
29 30
21
28 22
27
31
32
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Toner cartridge lock release lever Toner cartridge Document feeder tray (when the SPF is installed) Original guides (when the SPF is installed) Feeding roller cover (when the SPF is installed) Right side cover (when the SPF is installed) Fusing unit release levers Roller rotating knob Exit area (when the SPF is installed) Reversing tray (when the RSPF is installed) Photoconductive drum Fusing unit paper guide
To replace the toner cartridge, pull out the toner cartridge while pushing on this lever. Contains toner. Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up here. Up to 40 sheets can be placed. Adjust to the size of the originals. Open to remove misfed originals. Open to remove misfed originals. To remove the paper misfed in the fusing unit, push down on these levers and remove the paper. Rotate to remove misfed paper. Originals exit the machine here after copying/scanning when the SPF is used. Pull out to remove misfed originals. Images are formed on the photoconductive drum. Open to remove misfed paper.
Warning: The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch the fusing unit when removing misfed paper. Doing so may cause a burn or injury. Caution: Do not touch the photoconductive drum (green portion) when removing the misfed paper. Doing so may damage the drum and cause smudges on copies. Note: The model name is on the front cover of the machine.
manuals4you.com
3. Operation panel
2 3 4
26
A
27
B
28
C
29
D
30
E
41
P
42
Q
43
R
44
S
45 COPY
T
31
F
32
G
33
H
34
I
35
J
46
U
47
V
48
W
49
XYZ
50
SP
ON LINE DATA PRINT
36
K
37
L
38
M
39
N
40
O
SPEAKER REDIAL/PAUSE SHIFT
SPEED SYMBOL
COMM. SETTING SPACE/
SCAN LINE FAX DATA
13
14
1 2 3
Keys for fax function (when the fax option is installed) [COPY] key/indicator [PRINT] key/indicator
These are used in fax mode. Press to select copy mode. If pressed when "Ready to copy." appears or during warm-up, the total number of sheets used appears while the key is pressed. Press to select print mode. ONLINE indicator Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit. DATA indicator This lights steadily when there is a print job in memory that has not been printed, and blinks during printing. Press to select scan mode. Shows various messages. For more information see page 5-5. Press to return the display to the previous screen. This key is used in fax mode. Press to enter the selected setting. The selected number of copies appears. During copying, this shows the remaining number of copies. Use to select the number of copies. Interrupts a copy run to allow an interrupt copy job to be performed. Press to clear the set number of copies or stop a copy run. Information lamp blinks, when facsimile is received, or when the paper remains in the tray. This key is used in fax mode.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
[SCAN] key/indicator Display [BACK] key [FAX STATUS] key [OK] key Copy number display Numeric keys [INTERRUPT] key/INTERRUPT indicator [C] key Information lamp (when the fax option is installed) [FAX] key/indicator (when the fax option is installed) LINE indicator, DATA indicator
For U.S.A.
6 7
10 11
12
FAX STATUS
BACK
OK
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS COPY EXPOSURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO % OUTPUT DUPLEX SPECIAL FUNCTION SCAN COLOR MODE RESOLUTION ADDRESS FORMAT ORIGINAL SIZE DUPLEX SCAN FAX PROGRAM RESOLUTION ADDRESS BROADCAST ORIGINAL SIZE DUPLEX SCAN
TUV
WXYZ
@.-_
ACC. #-C
READ-END
15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23
24
25 26 27
For other country
6 7
10 11
12
FAX STATUS
BACK
OK
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS PAPER COPY EXPOSURE SELECT COPY RATIO AUTO IMAGE OUTPUT 2-SIDED COPY
TUV
WXYZ
SPECIAL FUNCTION
@.-_
SCAN COLOUR MODE FORMAT RESOLUTION ADDRESS ORIGINAL SIZE DUPLEX SCAN FAX PROGRAM BROADCAST
ACC. #-C
READ-END
15 16 17 18 19 20
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 [EXPOSURE] key [PAPER] key (PAPER SELECT key) [ZOOM] key (COPY RATIO key) [AUTO%] key (AUTO IMAGE key) [SORT] key (Only effective when the dual function board is installed) [DUPLEX] key (2-SIDED COPY key) (only on models that support two-sided printing) Arrow keys [SPECIAL FUNCTION] key [ACC.#-C] key [0] key [READ-END] key [START] key/indicator [CA] key
21 22 23
24
25 26 27
Use to select the exposure mode. "AUTO", "TEXT", or "PHOTO" can be selected. Use to manually select a paper tray. Press to select a reduction or enlargement copy ratio. Press to have the copy ratio selected automatically. Use to select the sort function. Select the two-sided copying mode. Press to move the highlighting (which indicates that an item is selected) in the display. Press to select special functions. Press the end the use of an account and return the display to the account number entry screen. Press during a continuous copy run to display the number of copies completed. When copying in sort mode from the document glass, press this key when you have finished scanning the original pages and are ready to start copying. Copying is possible when this indicator is on. Press the key to start copying. Clears all selected settings and returns the machine to the default settings.
manuals4you.com
4. Display(base screen)
Example: Copy mode
1 2 3 4
Icons appearing in the special function icon display

1-sided to 2-sided copy 2-sided to 2-sided copy 2-sided to 1-sided copy Sort function*
7
Center erase copy* Edge + Center erase* 2 in 1 copy* 4 in 1 copy* Dual page copy Card shot*
Ready to copy. 812 x11

AUTO
100% 8 12 x11
5 6
AUTO
Margin shift copy*

* The display shown is the AR-M207 (when the optional RSPF is installed) display.
Erase copy*
* These only appear when the dual function board is installed.
1 2 3 4
Exposure display Special function icon display Message display Original size display
Indicates the selected exposure mode. Icons of enabled special functions will appear. Messages are displayed regarding machine status and operation. The size of the placed original and the icon of the original scanning mode will appear. : One-sided scanning in the SPF. : Scanning on the document glass : Two-sided scanning in the RSPF. Displays the copy ratio for reduction or enlargement. Displays the selected paper size. When "AUTO" appears, the most suitable size of paper is automatically selected. The selected paper tray is highlighted.
5 6 7
Copy ratio display Paper size display Paper tray display
5. Motor, solenoid, clutch
1 2 3 4
18 19
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
17
16
15
14
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Mirror motor Shifter motor Toner motor Duplex motor
Name
Code MRM SHTM TM DPX CFM MM CPFC1 RRC CPSOL1 RRS MPTC MPFC MPFS CPFC2 FSOL1 CPFC1 PSOL2 VFM Shifts the paper exit tray. Toner supply
Function operation
Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
Switchback operation and paper exit motor in duplex. Cools the inside of the machine. Drives the machine. Drive the pick up roller Drives the resist roller Solenoid for paper feed from cassette Resist roller rotation control solenoid Drives the manual paper transport roller. Drives the manual paper feed roller. Manual paper feed solenoid Drives the 2nd tray transport roller. 2nd tray transport solenoid Drives the 2nd tray paper feed roller. 2nd tray transport solenoid Cools the inside of the machine. Job separator tray up/down
Cooling fan motor Main motor 1st tray paper feed clutch PS clutch Paper feed solenoid Resist roller solenoid Manual paper transport clutch Manual paper feed clutch Manual paper feed solenoid 2nd tray transport clutch 2nd tray transport solenoid 2nd tray paper feed clutch 2nd tray paper feed solenoid Exhaust fan motor Job separator motor
manuals4you.com
6. Sensor, switch
1 22 23 2 24 3
18 19 20
4 17 16 5 6 7 8 21
15 14 10 13 11 12 9
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Name Mirror home position sensor Side door switch Paper exit sensor (paper exit side) Shifter home position sensor Paper exit sensor (DUP side) Thermistor Thermostat Toner density sensor 2nd tray detection switch Manual sensor 2nd tray door open/close sensor 2nd tray door paper pass sensor 2nd tray paper empty sensor Paper in sensor Cassette empty Front cover SW Power switch Tray full sensor Job separator paper presence/empty sensor Job separator HP sensor Lower limit switch OC sensor Original size sensor(Main Scaning) Original size sensor(Sub Scaning)
Code MHPS DSWR POD1 SFTHP PDPX RTH TCS MPED DRS2 PPD2 CSS2 PIN
MAIN SW TRAY-D TRAY-FULL LFT UP / JOBS_DLD OCSW DSIN0 DSIN1
Function operation Detects the mirror (scanner unit) home position. Side door open detection Detects paper exit. Shifter home position detection Paper transport detection Fusing section temperature detection Fusing section abnormally high temperature detection Toner quantity detection 2nd tray detection Manual transport detection 2nd tray door open/close detection 2nd tray paper entry detection 2nd tray paper empty detection Paper transport detection Tray paper entry detection Front cover open detection Turns ON/OFF the main power source. Tray full detection Job separator tray paper presence/empty detection Job separator HP detection Job separator tray lower limit position detection Original cover and SPF open/close detection Original size detection Original size detection
7. PWB unit
2 13 6 3 4 1
12 10 11
9 8
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Name Copy lamp Inverter PWB I / F PWB CCD sensor PWB Main control PWB Tray PWB IMC2 PWB 2nd cassette PWB High voltage PWB Power PWB Operation main PWB LCD OPE PWB FAX KEY PWB FAX main PWB
Function operation Copy lamp control USB1.1, IEEE1284 I/F Image scanning Main control PWB Shifter motor control Electronic sort, USB2.0 << Option:AR-EB9>> 2nd cassette control High voltage control AC power input/DC power control Operation panel input/Display, operation panel section control Display and operation panel control FAX operation input, key operation input<< Option:AR-FX11>> FAX control<< Option:AR-FX11>>
manuals4you.com
8. Cross sectional view

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
18
23
22 21 20 19 17 16
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Name Copy lamp Copy lamp unit LSU unit Lens unit MC holder unit Paper exit roller Transport roller Upper heat roller Lower heat roller Waste toner transport roller Drum unit Transfer charger unit DUP follower roller Duplex transport roller Resist roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper pick up roller No. 2/3 mirror unit Manual transport roller 2nd tray paper transport roller 2nd tray paper pick up roller (semi-circular roller) 1st tray paper feed roller (semi-circular roller) MG roller
Function/Operation Image radiation lamp Operates in synchronization with No. 2/3 mirror unit to radiate documents sequentially. Converts image signals into laser beams to write on the drum. Reads images with the lens and the CCD. Supplies negative charges evenly on the drum. Used to discharge paper. Used to transport paper. Fuses toner on paper (with the Teflon roller). Fuses toner on paper (with the silicon rubber roller). Transports waste toner to the waste toner box. Forms images. Transfer images (on the drum) onto paper. Transports paper for duplex . Takes synchronization between the paper lead edge and the image lead edge. Manual paper feed tray Picks up paper in manual paper feed. Reflects the images from the copy lamp unit to the lens unit. Transports paper from the manual paper feed port. Transports paper from the 2nd tray. Picks up paper from the 2nd tray. Picks up paper from the 1st tray. Puts toner on the OPC drum.
manuals4you.com
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

1. Installing conditions
A. Copier installation
Do not install your copier in areas that are: damp, humid, or very dusty exposed to direct sunlight poorly ventilated subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
2) Open the front cover. Hold the both sides and pull down to open.
3) Loosen the screw and remove the developer cartridge.
B. Power source
Use an exclusive-use power outlet. If the power plug of this machine is inserted into a power outlet commonly used with other illumination units, flickers of the lamp may be result. Use a power outlet which is not used commonly with any illumination units. Avoid complex wiring.
C. Grounding wire connection.

To avoid danger, be sure to connect a grounding wire. If no grounding wire is connected and a leakage occurs, a fire or an electric shock may be result. 4) Remove the developer tank from the developer cartridge.
2. Removal of protective material and fixing screw

1) Remove all tapes and protective material. Remove all tapes, then open the document cover and remove the protective material of sheet shape 2) Remove the fixing screw. Use a coin to remove the fixing screw. The fixing screw is required when transporting the machine. Keep it in the tray. (Refer to the later description.) 5) Supply developer into the developer tank while rotating the MG roller in the arrow direction.
MG roller
* Shake the developer bag enough before opening it.
3.Installing procedure
A.Developer cartridge installation
1) Open the manual tray, and open the side cover.
Hook
Note: Check that the DV seal is free from developing agent. If developing agent is attached to the DV seal, clean it carefully. Check to insure that the hook is engaged in two positions. 6) Attach the developer tank to the developer cartridge. * After supplying developer into the developer cartridge, do not tilt or shake the developer cartridge. 7) Attach the developer cartridge to the copier, and fix it with the screw.
AR-M207 M165 M162 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5-1
B. Toner cartridge installation

1) Shake the toner cartridge several times horizontally, and remove the tape. * Do not hold the shutter lever when shaking. * After removing the tape, do not tilt or shake the toner cartridge.
4. Removal and storage of fixing screw

1) Lift the knob and gently pull out the tray.
4 or 5 times
Shutter Tape Handle

2) Attach the toner cartridge to the copier. 2) Hold the paper pressure plate and turn the fixing screw in the arrow direction.
3) Pull the shutter lever.
3) Store the fixing pin and the fixing screw in the tray. Store the fixing screw which was removed in the above procedure 2 and the fixing screw which was removed in procedure 2 of 2. Removal of protective material and fixing screw in the storage place in the tray.
Pressure plate lock
Screw
Close the front cover A, then close the side cover B. When closing the front cover, gently press the both sides. When closing the side cover, hold the knob. When closing the covers, be sure to close the front cover first, then close the side cover. If closed in a wrong sequence, the covers may be broken.
manuals4you.com
5. Changing the paper size setting of a tray

If the size of the loaded paper is different from the size shown in the display, follow the steps below to change the paper size setting of the tray. The paper size setting cannot be changed during copying, printing, fax printing (when the fax option is installed), or interrupt copying, or when a misfeed has occurred. However, if the machine is out of paper or out of toner, the paper size setting can be changed during copying, printing, and fax printing. The paper size cannot be set for the bypass tray. 1) Press the [SPECIAL FUNCTION] key.
4) Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper tray for which the paper size is being changed.
Example: Tray 2
PAPER SIZE SET 8 12 x11 11x17 11x17 812 x14 812 x11 812 x11R
5) Press the [ ] key.
DUPLEX SPECIAL FUNCTION DUPLEX SCAN DUPLEX SCAN
ACC.
The special function screen will appear.
SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL MODES ORIG. SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST
PAPER SIZE SET 812 x11 11x17 11x17 8 12 x14 8 12 x11 8 12 x11R
The cursor moves to the paper size selection position on the right. 6) Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper size.
The screen shown above is the copy mode screen. 2) Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select "PAPER SIZE SET".
GH
PQR DUPLEX SPECIAL FUNCTION DUPLEX SCAN
SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL MODES ORIG. SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST
Example: Selecting 8-1/2" x 14" size
PAPER SIZE SET 812 x11 11x17 11x17 8 12 x14 8 12 x11 8 12 x11R
To change the size of another paper tray, press the [ repeat steps 4 to 6. ] key and then
3) Press the [OK] key.
BACK
OK
GHI
The paper size setting screen will appear.

Note : Shows tray "1". : Shows tray "2".
PAPER SIZE SET 812 x11R 11x17 11x17 8 12 x14 8 12 x11 8 12 x11R
7) Press the [OK] key. A message asking you to confirm the new paper size setting will appear. 8) Press the [OK] key. The selected paper size will be stored and the display will return to the base screen. Note Affix the paper size label for the paper size selected in step 6 to the label position on the right end of the tray.
manuals4you.com
[6] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Adjustment item list
Section A Process section (1) (2) (3) (4) B Mechanism section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) C Image density adjustment (1) Adjustment item Developing doctor gap adjustment MG roller main pole position adjustment Developing bias voltage check Main charger voltage check Image position adjustment Main scanning direction(FR direction) distortion balance adjustment Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion adjustment Main scanning direction (FR direction) magnification ratio adjustment SIM 50 No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing position adjustment Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment Rail height adjustment SIM 48-1 Adjustment procedure/SIM No. Developing doctor gap adjustment MG roller main pole position adjustment
Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) magnification ratio OC mode in copying (SIM 48-1) adjustment SPF mode in copying (SIM 48-5) Off center adjustment SPF white correction pixel position adjustment (required in an SPF model when replacing the lens unit) Copy mode OC mode (SIM 50-12) SIM 63-7 SIM 46-1
2. Copier adjustment
A.Process section
(1) Developing doctor gap adjustment
1) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A. 2) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the three positions at 20mm and 130mm from the both ends of the developing doctor as shown.
(2) MG roller main pole position adjustment

1) Remove and separate the waste toner box and put the developing unit on a flat surface. 2) Tie a string to a needle or a pin. 3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller horizontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a correct adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for this adjustment.) 4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but bring it to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark the point on the MG roller which is on the extension line from the needle tip. 5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of the doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is 18mm. If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fixing screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
3) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten developing doctor fixing screw. (Perform the same procedure for front and the rear frames.) 4) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw lock. * When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch developing doctor and the MG roller. <Adjustment specification>
the the the the
Developing doctor gap

Both ends (20mm from the both ends) : 1.5 +0.1 mm - 0.15 C (Center) (150mm from the both ends) :1.55 +0.15 mm - 0.2
AR-M207 M165 M162 ADJUSTMENT 6-1
(3)Developing bias voltage check

Note: Use a digital multi-meter with an internal resistance of 10M or more. 1) Set the digital multi-meter range to DC700V. 2) Put the test rod of the digital multi-meter on the developing bias voltage output check pin. 3) Turn on the power, execute SIM25-1.
B. Mechanism section
(1) Image position adjustment
a. OC image lead edge position adjustment (SIM 50-1) Note: In advance to this adjustment, the sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment must be performed. 1) Set a scale on the OC table as shown below.
2) Make a copy. 3) Check the copy output. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures. 4) Execute SIM 50-01. Select a desired mode with the arrow keys, enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. When [START] key is pressed, a sheet is printed. When [RETURN] key is pressed, the process returns to the mode selection window. <Specification> Mode Developing bias voltage Specification DC - 4008V
(Mode selection window 1) Sim50-1 LEAD EDGE 1:TRAY1 50 2:TRAY2 50 3:MFT 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50 (Copy start window) Ready to copy. S 100% 8 1/2X11 (Mode selection window 2) Sim50-1 LEAD EDGE 4:DEN-A 50 5:RRC-A 1 6:DEN-B 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50 (Copy execution window) Copies in progress. S 100% 8 1/2X11
(4) Grid bias voltage check

Note: Use a digital multi-meter with an internal resistance of 10M or more. 1) Set the digital multi-meter range to DC700V. 2) Put the test rod of the digital multi-meter on the grid bias voltage output check pin. 3) Turn on the power. (The voltage is outputted in the grid bias High output mode during warming up, and in the grid bias Low output mode when warming up is completed.)
<Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode OC image lead edge position Main cassette print start position 2nd cassette print start position Multi bypass tray print start position Lead edge void SIM SIM 50-1 Display text array RRC-A TRAY1 Set value R/0.1 H/0.1 Spec value Lead edge void: 1 - 4mm Image loss: 3mm or less Set range 1 - 99
TRAY2
MFT
DEN-A
B/0.05
5) Set the OC lead edge position set value (RRC-A) to [1] The OC image scanning start position is shifted inside the document edge. 6) Set the main cassette lead edge void adjustment value (DEN-A)* to [1] The lead edge void becomes the minimum. <Specification> Mode Grid bias LOW Grid bias HIGH Specification DC - 3808V DC - 52510V
manuals4you.com
7) Set the main cassette print start position value (TRAY1) to [1] and make a copy. The print start position is shifted inside the document edge.
10) Set the lead edge void adjustment value (DEN-A)* again. 1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.1mm shift. Calculate the set value from the formula below. B/0.05 (mm) = Lead edge void adjustment value <B: Lead edge void (mm)>
5mm 5 4mm 10
2.5mm 5
2.5mm
*The dimension varies depending on the model.
10
8) Measure the image loss R of the copied image. Enter the set value of the image scanning lead edge position (RRC-A) again. 1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.1mm shift. Calculate the set value from the formula below. R/0.1(mm) = Image loss set value <R: Image loss measurement value (mm)>
Example:
When setting the lead edge void to 2.5mm :2.5 /0.05 = about 50 Note: If the set value is not obtained from the above formula, perform the fine adjustment.
5mm
b.SPF image lead edge position adjustment (SIM50-6)

0mm
1) Set a scale on the OC table as shown below.
10
* The scanning edge is set. (A line may be printed by scanning the document edge.)
Example: 4/0.1 = 40 = about 40 Note: If the set value is not obtained from the above formula, perform the fine adjustment. 9) Measure the distance H between the paper lead edge and the image print start position. Set the image print start position set value (TRAY1) again. 1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.1mm shift. Calculate the set value from the formula below. H/0.1(mm) = Image print start position set value <H: Print start position measurement value (mm)> Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in parallel with the edge lines. 2) Make a copy, Then use the copy output as an original to make an SPF copy again. 3) Check the copy output. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures. 4) Execute SIM 50-6. 5) Set the SPF lead edge position set value (SIDE1) so that the same image is obtained as that obtained in the previous OC image lead edge position adjustment.
(Mode selection window) Sim50-6 SPF EDGE 1:SIDE1 50 2:SIDE2 50 3:END EDGE 50 [ 1- 99] 50 (Copy start window) Ready to copy. S 100% 8 1/2X11 (Copy execution window) Copies in progress. S 100% 8 1/2X1
0mm 0mm 5
10
*Fit the print edge with the paper edge, and perform the lead edge adjustment.
Example: 5/0.1 = 50 = about 50 Note: If the set value is not obtained from the above formula, perform the fine adjustment.
<Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode SIM Display text array Set value Spec value Set range 1 - 99
d. Paper off center adjustment (SIM50-10) 1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the document table. 2) Select a paper feed port and make a copy. Compare the copy and the test chart. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedure. 3) Execute SIM 50-10. After completion of warm-up, shading is performed and the currently set off center adjustment value of each paper feed port is displayed.
Sim50-10 PRT. CENTER 1:TRAY1 50 2:TRAY2 50 3:TRAY3 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50 Sim50-10 PRT. CENTER 4:TRAY4 50 5:BYPASS 50 6:DUPLEX 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50
SPF image lead edge position (1st print surface)
SIM 50-6
SIDE1 1 step: 0.1mm shift
Lead edge void: 1 - 4mm Image loss: 3mm or less
c.Rear edge void adjustment (SIM50-1, SIM50-19) 1) Set a scale as shown in the figure below.
A4(8.5" x 11")
4) Enter the set value and press the start key. The correction value is stored and a copy is made. <Adjustment specification> Adjustment mod Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 Manual paper feed tray Duplex (Second print surface) SIM SIM 50-10 Display text array TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 Set value Specification Set range 1 - 99
Add 1: Single: 0.1mm shift Center to R side. 2.0mm
Paper rear edge
2) Set the document size to A4 (8.5" x 11"), and make a copy at 100%. 3) If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedure.
Void amount (Standard value: 4mm or less)
TRAY4 Reduce 1: BYPASS 0.1mm shift to L side. DUPLEX
e.Side edge void area adjustment (SIM26-43)

Scale image Paper rear edge
Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the paper off center adjustment (SIM 50-10) is completed. 1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the document table. 2) Select a paper feed port and make a copy. Compare the copy and the test chart. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedure. 3) Execute SIM 26-43 and set the density mode to SIDE VOID (L), SIDE VOID (R). The currently set adjustment value is displayed.
Sim26-43 SIDE VOID 1:SIDE VOID(L) 3 2:SIDE VOID(R) 3 [ 0- 10] 3
4) Execute SIM50-01 and select DEN-B with the arrow keys. The currently set adjustment value is displayed. 5) Enter the set value and press the start key. The correction value is stored and a copy is made. <Adjustment specification> Mode Rear edge void SIM SIM 50-1 Display text array DEN-B Set value Specification Set range 1 - 99
1 step: 4mm or 0.1mm shift less
4) Enter the set value and press the start key. The correction value is stored. <Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode Side void (left) Side void (right) SIM 26-43 Display text array Set value Specification Set range 1 - 99
SIDE 1 step: 0.5 - 4mm VOID (L) 0.5mm shift SIDE VOID (R)
manuals4you.com
(2) Main scanning direction(FR direction) distortion balance adjustment

1) Remove the OC glass and the right cabinet.
(1) (2) (1) (4) (3)
4) Loosen the set screw of the scanner drive pulley which is not in contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit positioning plate. 5) Without moving the scanner drive pulley shaft, manually turn the scanner drive pulley until the positioning plate is brought into contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit, then fix the scanner drive pulley.
(3)
2) Loosen the copy lamp unit wire fixing screw.
Wire fixing screw
6) Put No. 2/3 mirror base unit on the positioning plate again, push the projections on the front frame side and the rear frame side of the copy lamp unit to the corner frame, and tighten the wire fixing screw.
3) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley and bring No. 2/3 mirror base unit into contact with the positioning plate. At that time, if the front frame side and the rear frame side of No. 2/3 mirror base unit are brought into contact with the positioning plate at the same time, the mirror base unit parallelism is proper. If one of them is in contact with the positioning plate, perform the adjustment of 4).
(3) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion adjustment

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: When the mirror base drive wire is replaced. When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced. When a copy as shown is made.
4) Loosen the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw on the front frame side or on the rear frame side.
When La < Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the front frame side in the arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
When La > Lb
La Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the rear frame side in the arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
Rear side
Paper exit direction Original Copy
A
1) Set A3 (11" x 17") white paper on the original table as shown below.
Front side
Allow a little space.
5) Tighten the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw. <Adjustment specification> La = Lb 6) Execute the main scanning direction (FR) distortion balance adjustment previously described in 2) again.
Glass holding plate A3 (11" x 17") white paper Fit the paper edge and the glass holding plate edge.
2) Open the original cover and make a normal (100%) copy. 3) Measure the width of the black background at the lead edge and at the rear edge.
(4) Main scanning direction (FR direction) magnification ratio adjustment (SIM 48-1)
Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the CCD unit is properly installed. 1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below.
Paper exit direction La: Lead edge black background width Lb: Rear edge black background width
If the width (La) of the black background at the lead edge is equal that (Lb) at the rear edge, there is no need to execute the following procedures of 4) - 7). 2) Execute SIM 48-1. 3) After completion of warming up, shading is operated and the current correction value of the main scanning direction magnification ratio is displayed on the screen.
Sim48-1 COPY MAG. 1:F-R 50 2:SCAN 50 [ 1- 99] 50
4) Enter the set values of the items of F and R, and press [START] key. The correction values are saved and a copy is made.
manuals4you.com
<Adjustment specification> Note: A judgment must be made with 200mm width, and must not be made with 100mm width. Adjustment mode Main scanning direction magnification ratio SIM 48-1 Display text array F-R Set value +1 +0.1% -1 0.1% Specifications Normal 1.0% Set range 1 - 99
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy to make a test chart.
(5) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) magnification ratio adjustment (SIM 48-1, SIM 48-5)
a. OC mode in copying (SIM48-1) Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the CCD unit is properly installed. 1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy.
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in parallel with the edge lines. 2) Set the test chart on the SPF and make a normal (100%) copy. 3) Compare the scale image and the actual image. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures. 4) Execute SIM 48-5. 5) After warm-up, shading is performed. 6) Check to confirm that the RSPF (SIDE1) mode is selected with the cross cursor.
Sim48-5 (R)SPF ZOOM 1:RSPF(SIDE1) 50 2:RSPF(SIDE2) 50 [ 1- 99] 50
7) Enter the set value and press the start key. The set value is stored and a copy is made. 2) Compare the scale image and the actual image. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures. 3) Execute SIM 48-1. 4) After completion of warming up, shading is operated and the current correction value of the sub scanning direction magnification ratio is displayed on the screen.
Sim48-1 COPY MAG. 1:F-R 50 2:SCAN 50 [ 1- 99] 50
<Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode Sub scanning direction magnification ratio (Front surface) Sub scanning direction magnification ratio (Back surface) SIM 48-5 Display text array Set value Specifications Normal 1.0% Set range 1 - 99
RSPF +1 (SIDE1) +0.1% -1 0.1% RSPF (SIDE2)
5) Select [2.SCAN] mode with the cross cursor.

Sim48-1 COPY MAG. 1:F-R 50 50 2:SCAN [ 1- 99] 50
* RSPF (SIDE2) is displayed only when the RSPF is installed.
(6) Off center adjustment (SIM 50-12)

a. OC mode (SIM50-12)
6) Enter the set value and press the start key. The set value is stored and a copy is made. <Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode SIM Display text array SCAN Set value +1 +0.1% -1 0.1% Specifications Normal 1.0% Set range 1 - 99
1) Make a test chart as shown below and set it so that its center line is fit with the original guide center mark. * To make a test chart, draw a line on A3 or 11" x 17" paper at the center in the paper transport direction.
Original guide
Sub scanning 48-1 direction magnification ratio OC mode
Center Copy paper (A3 or 17" x 11")
b. RSPF sub scanning direction magnification ratio (SIM48-5) Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the CCD unit is properly installed. Before performing this adjustment, the OC mode adjustment in copying must be completed.
2) Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray, and compare the copy and the test chart. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures. 3) Execute SIM 50-12.
4) After completion of warming up, shading is performed and the current off-center adjustment value is displayed on the LCD.
Sim50-12 ORG. CENTER 1:OC 50 2:SPF(SIDE1) 50 3:SPF(SIDE2) 50 [ 1- 99] 50
3) Slide the lens unit toward the rear side and attach it,then execute SIM.
5) Enter the set value and press the start key. The set value is stored and a copy is made. <Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode SIM Display text array OC Set value +1 Shifted to R side by +0.mm. -1 Shifted to L side by 0.1mm. Specifications Center 2.0% Set range 1 - 99 * When the lens unit is moved, execute the Main scanning direction (SIM48-1,F-R), off center adjustment(SIM50-12) and the PF original off-center adjustment. * This adjustment is basically O.K. with SIM 63-7.
Document off- 50-12 center (OC mode)
C.Image density adjustment

(1)Copy mode (SIM 46-1)
1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the OC table as shown below.
(7) SPF white correction pixel position adjustment(SIM63-7) (required in an SPF model when replacing the lens unit)
1) Fully open the SPF. 2) Execute SIM 63-7.
(Initial window) Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST ERROR [---] PRESS OK KEY EXEC
Failure
PRESS OK KEY EXEC OK/START (Execution window) Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST Success
2) Put several sheets of A3 or 11" x 17" white paper on the test chart. 3) Execute SIM 46-1. 4) After completion of warming up, shading is performed, and the current density level is displayed on the LCD.
Sim46-1 EXP LEVEL 1:AE 50 2:TEXT 50 3:PHOTO 1 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50 Sim46-1 EXP LEVEL 4:PHOTO 2 50 5:TEXT(TS) 50 6:AE(TS) 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50
EXEC
Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST COMPLETE [160] PRESS OK KEY EXEC
3) When [COMPLETE] is displayed on the LCD, the process is completed. 4) If the operation panel displays "ERROR,"perform the following measures. When the display is --: Check that the SPF is open. Check that the lamp is ON.(If the lamp is OFF, check the MCU connector.) Check that the CCD harness is properly inserted into the MCU connector. When the display is 281 or above: 1) Remove the table glass. 2) Remove the dark box. 3) Slide the lens unit toward the front side and attach it, then execute SIM. When the display is 143 or below: 1) Remove the table glass. 2) Remove the dark box.
Use the cross cursor to select a mode. 5) Change the set value with the 10-key to adjust the copy image density. 6) Make a copy and check that the specification below is satisfied. <Adjustment specification> Density Display Expomode text sure array level Automatic Text Photo (Error diffusion) AE TEXT PHOTO 1 3 3 Sharp Gray Chart output Set value Set range 1 - 99
2 is slightly The greater the set copied. value is, the darker 3 is slightly the density is. The smaller the set copied. 2 is slightly value is, the lighter the density is. copied.
PHOTO Photo (Dither) 2 Toner save (Text) Toner save (Automatic) TEXT (TS) AE(TS)
3 3
2 is slightly copied. 3 is slightly copied. 2 is slightly copied.
manuals4you.com
[7] SIMULATIONS
1. Entering the simulation mode
Perform the following procedure to enter the simulation mode. "#" key * key "C" key * key Main code Start key Sub code Start key
3. List of simulations
Main code 01 02 Sub code 01 02 01 02 03 08 09 10 11 03 02 03 04 11 05 01 02 03 06 01 02 10 07 01 06 08 08 01 02 03 06 09 01 02 04 05 10 14 16 20 21 22 01 01 01 03 04 07 09 13 14 15 22 24 01 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 13 14 15 Contents Mirror scanning operation Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display Single paper feeder (SPF) aging *2 SPF sensor status display *2 SPF motor operation check *2 SPF paper feed solenoid operation check *2 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check *2 *3 RSPF paper exit gate solenoid operation check *2 *3 SPF PS release solenoid operation check *2 Shifter/job separator sensor status display Shifter operation check Job separator operation check *4 Shifter home position check Operation panel display check Fusing lamp and cooling fan operation check Copy lamp lighting check Paper feed/transport solenoid operation check Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check Main cassette semicircular roller cleaning Warm-up display and aging with jam Intermittent aging Shifting with warm-up display Developing bias output Main charger output (Grid = HIGH) Main charger output (Grid = LOW) Transfer charger output Duplex motor forward rotation check *6 Duplex motor reverse rotation check *6 Duplex motor RPM adjustment *6 Duplex motor switchback time adjustment Toner motor operation Trouble cancel (except for U2) U2 trouble cancel Maintenance counter clear Maintenance cycle setting Counters display Jam memory display Jam total counter display Key operator code display Paper feed counter display CRUM destination display *5 P-ROM version display Trouble memory display SPF jam counter display *2 Jam total counter clear Trouble memory clear SPF counter clear *2 Duplex print counter clear *6 Paper feed counter clear Drum counter clear Copy counter clear Printer counter clear Scanner counter clear SPF jam total counter clear *2 Scanner mode counter clear
2. Canceling the simulation mode

When the clear all key is pressed, the simulation mode is cancelled. When the interruption key is pressed, the process is interrupted and the screen returns to the sub code entering display. * After canceling the simulation mode, be sure to turn OFF/ON the power and check the operation. Note: If the machine is terminated by a jam error or paper empty during copying in the adjustment by the simulation, recopying is required. Note: The values in the simulation columns are not default values but sample values.
AR-M207 M165 M162 SIMULATIONS 7-1
Main code 25
Sub code 01 10
Contents Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check) Polygon motor operation check Job separator setting Size setting Auditor setting Copier duplex setting Count mode setting Destination setting Machine condition check Toner save mode setting Job separator paper exit mode setting Language setting clear CE mark conformity control ON/OFF Auditor mode exclusive setup Cancel of stop at maintenance life over Cancel of stop at developer life over Memory capacity check Transfer ON/OFF timing control setting Side void amount setting Copy temporary stop function setting LCD contrast PWM duty setting FAX mode key Enable/Disable setting Toner save setting display/non-display Total counter display change setting Paper sensor status display Document size detection photo sensor check Document size detection photo sensor detection level adjustment Document size detection photo sensor light receiving/ detection level check Detection level adjustment when the document size is settled(15degrees - 20degrees) Developing counter clear Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) Standby mode fusing fan rotation setting Fusing paper interval control allow/inhibit setting Transfer current setting Setting of rotation time before toner supply Copy density adjustment (300dpi) Copy density adjustment (600dpi) Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Text) 300dpi Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Text) 600dpi Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Photo) 600dpi Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) Exposure mode setting (Gamma table setting/AE operation mode setting/ Photo image process setting) SPF exposure correction *2 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) AE limit setting Image sharpness adjustment Main/sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment SPF/RSPF mode sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment in copying *2 Flash ROM program writing mode
Main code 50
Sub code 01 06 10 12 18 19
Contents Image lead edge adjustment Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) *2 Paper off-center adjustment Document off-center adjustment Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy *1 Rear edge void adjustment in duplex copy *6 Resist amount adjustment SPF scanning position automatic adjustment *2 SPF scanning position setting HSYNC output check Shading check SPF automatic correction *2 Self print Key reception time setting display/non-display setting Info lamp setting USB reception speed adjustment
26
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 18 20 22 30 31 36 37 39 42 43 51 54 60 73 74
51 53 61 63 64 65 67
02 08 10 03 01 07 01 10 11 50
30 41
01 01 02 03 04
<Execution inhibit conditions> *1) Execution is inhibited when the duplex setup is OFF and other than RSPF is set. *2) Execution is inhibited when OC. *3) Execution is inhibited when SPF. (Not RSPF) *4) Execution is inhibited when the job separator is not installed. *5) Execution is inhibited when the model is not provided with the CRUM. *6) Execution is inhibited when the duplex setup is OFF.
42 43
01 01 12 13
44 46
34 40 01 02 09 10 11 18 19
20 29 30 31 48 01 05 49 01
manuals4you.com
4. Contents of simulations
Main code 01 Sub code 01 Mirror scanning operation Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit. Enter the number of times and the magnification ratio, and press [OK] key to operate the scanner unit. The speed is variable according to the specified magnification ratio. The number of scanning can be specified by entering a value to the right lower section of the LCD. Setting range of magnification ratio: 25%-400% Setting range of the number of scanning: 0-999 (When 0 is set, it means unlimited. )
(Scan number input window) Sim1-1 SCAN CHECK MHPS 115% 100% 86% 123 ZOOM 100% 5 Set the scan magnification ration. This magnification ratio accords with the scan speed in actual copying. The setting range is 25% - 400%. Specify the scan number to be performed. The setting range is 0 - 999. When 0 is set, the number is unlimited.
Contents
Remark
OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim1-1 SCAN CHECK MHPS 115% 100% 86% 123 ZOOM 100% EXEC
MHPS sensor status Scan counter Highlighted during execution
Used to display the status (ON/OFF) of the mirror HP sensor on the LCD during scanning. (Highlighted at ON) "EXEC" is displayed to indicate execution is in process. The scan counter is displayed above "EXEC." This counter is counted up even in simulation. The copy lamp is lighted during scanning. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Returns to the sub code input window. [C] key: Input value clear 10 key: Input of the number of scanning 02 Mirror home positions sensor (MHPS) status display Used to monitor the mirror home position sensor and display the ON/OF status of the sensor on the LCD.
Sim1-2 SENSOR CHECK MHPS MHPS(MIRROR HOME POSITION SENSOR) ON :Highlight display OFF :Normal display
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Returns to the sub code input window.
manuals4you
.com
Main code 02
Sub code 01 Single Paper Feeder(SPF)aging
Contents
Remark
Used to check the operations of the SPF unit and its control circuit. Enter the magnification ratio and press OK or [START] key to drive the SPF unit at the speed corresponding to the setting.
(Magnification ratio selection window) Select the scan magnification ratio (drive speed). Sim2-1 SPF AGING This also accords with the magnification ratio and 115% 1SIDE the speed in copying similarly to the OC. 100% 2SIDE The setting range is 50% - 200%. 86% ZOOM 100% EXEC
OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim2-1 SPF AGING 115% 1SIDE 100% 2SIDE 86% ZOOM 100% EXEC
"EXEC" is highlighted during execution.
* When [Interruption] key is press, the simulation is terminated and the machine returns to the sub code input window. * When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated and the machine exits the simulation mode. 02 SPF sensor status display Used to display the sensor status in the SPF/RSPF section. An active sensor is highlighted.
Sim2-2 SENSOR CHECK SPFP L1 W2 OCCV L2 W3 POUT W0 SPFC W1 Displayed name : Sensor name SPFP :SPF document transportation sensor OCCV :SPF unit (OC cover) open/close sensor POUT :SPF paper exit sensor SPFC :SPF paper feed cover open/close sensor L1 :SPF paper length sensor 1 L2 :SPF paper length sensor 2 W0 :SPF document set sensor W1 :SPF paper width sensor (small) W2 :SPF paper width sensor (middle) W3 :SPF paper width sensor (large)
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Returns to the sub code input window. 03 SPF motor operation check Used to check the operation of the SPF motor and its control circuit. When this simulation is executed, the initial menu shown below is displayed. Select the magnification ratio to drive the motor.
(Initial window = Magnification ratio selection window) Select the scan magnification ratio (drive speed). Sim2-3 OUTPUT CHECK This also accords with the magnification ratio and 115% the speed in copying. 100% The setting range is 50% - 200%. 86% ZOOM 100% EXEC
OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim2-3 OUTPUT CHECK 115% 100% 86% ZOOM 100% EXEC
"EXEC" is highlighted during execution.
[CA] key: The SPF motor is stopped, and the machine exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: The SPF motor is stopped, and the machine returns to the sub code input window.
manuals4you.com
Main code 02
Sub code 08 SPF paper feed solenoid operation check
Contents
Remark
Used to drive the SPF paper feed solenoid (PSOL) 20 times in the cycle of 500msec of "ON" and 500msec of "OFF." After completion of the process, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
(Initial window) Sim2-8 SPUS CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim2-8 SPUS CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
When [Interruption] key is pressed, the machine returns to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode. 09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check Used to drive the SPF reverse solenoid (RSOL) 20 times in the cycle of 500msec of "ON" and 500msec of "OFF." After completion of the process, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
(Initial window) Sim2-9 SPFS CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim2-9 SPFS CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
When [Interruption] key is pressed, the machine returns to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode. 10 RSPF paper exit gate solenoid operation check Used to drive the SPF paper exit gate solenoid (GSOL) 20 times in the cycle of 500msec of "ON" and 500msec of "OFF." After completion of the process, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
(Initial window) Sim2-10 SGS CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim2-10 SGS CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
When [Interruption] key is pressed, the machine returns to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode. 11 SPF PS release solenoid operation check Used to drive the SPF PS release solenoid (CLH) 20 times in the cycle of 500msec of "ON" and 500msec of "OFF." After completion of the process, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
(Initial window) Sim2-11 CLH CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim2-11 CLH CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
When [Interruption] key is pressed, the machine returns to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode. 03 02 Shifter/job separator sensor status display Used to monitor the sensors related to the shifter and the job separator and display the sensor status on the LCD. An active sensor is highlighted.
Sim3-2 SENSOR SFTHP JSUP JSDL TRYF TRYD Displayed name SFTHP JSUP JSDL TRYF TRYD :Sensor name :Shifter home position sensor :Job separator upper limit sensor :Job separator lower limit sensor :Tray full sensor : Paper exit sensor
* Displayed only when the job separator is installed except for SFTH.
Main code 03
Sub code 03 Shifter operation check
Contents
Remark
Used to reciprocate the shifter 4 times. During execution, the status of the shifter HP sensor is displayed on the right upper section of the screen. (When the sensor is detected, the display is highlighted.) [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Returns to the sub code input window. * When the above end key is pressed during operation of the shifter, the shifter is returned to the home position before terminating the operations.
(Initial window) Sim3-3 SHIFTER CHK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim3-3 SHIFTER CHK SFTHP
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
04
Job separator operation check Used to operate the job separator up and down for 30sec. During operation, the status of the upper limit sensor and the lower limit sensor is displayed on the right upper section of the display. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode.[Interruption] key: Returns to the sub code input window. When the operation is interrupted, the job separator is shifted to the home position before terminating the simulation similarly to the shifter.
(Initial window) Sim3-4 JOBSEPA CHK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim3-4 JOBSEPA CHK JSUP JSDL PRESS OK KEY EXEC EXEC Display name Sensor name JSUP :Job separator upper limit sensor JSDL :Job separator lower limit sensor
11
Shifter home position check Used to check the operations of the shifter HP sensor and the shifter. When this simulation is executed, the initial menu is displayed. By the following key operations, the left operation and the right operation of the home position sensor and the shifter can be executed separately. [ ] key: Shifts to R side by the specified steps. [ ] key: Shifts to F side by the specified steps. [ ] key: Shift to the home position. [SFTHP] is highlighted when the HP sensor is detected.
(Initial window) Sim3-11 SHIFTER CHK SFTHP
]:R [
]:HP [
]:F
manuals4you.com
Main code 05
Sub code 01 Operation panel display check
Contents
Remark
<LED/LCD check mode> Used to check the operations (ON, display) of the LED and the LCD on the operation panel. When this simulation is executed, all LED's on the operation panel (including 7SEG) are lighted and checking LCD is started. For the operation check of LCD, the area is divided into two sections; upper section and lower section, and the display cycle of Normal Dark Light Off is repeated in each section. Each display period is 2sec.
Normal Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK. Dark Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK. Light Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK.
Normal Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK.
Dark Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK.
Light Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK.
Off Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK. Sub code input standby window
When [Interruption] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine returns to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode. When [START] key is pressed during LCD display, the machine goes to the key input check mode. <Key input check mode> Used to check that the keys on the operation panel are properly detected. When the machine enters the key input check mode, the initial menu is displayed.
(Initial window) Sim5-1 LCD/LED CHK.
When any key is pressed, the value on the right lower side is counted up. If a key is pressed once, it is not counted again. When [CA] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the simulation mode is terminated. When [Interrupt] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the window returns to the sub code input standby window. * Note for the key input check mode [Start] key must be pressed at the end. If it is pressed midway, the simulation judges that the last key is pressed and terminates the check mode. Multi input of tow or more keys is ignored.
Main code 05
Sub code 02 Fusing lamp and cooling fan operation check
Contents
Remark
Used to check the operations of the heater lamp and the cooling fan and the peripheral circuits. When this simulation is executed, the following initial menu is displayed.
(Initial window) Sim5-2 HT LAMP OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim5-2 HT LAMP
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
When this simulation is executed, the fusing lamp repeats ON/OFF 5 times in the cycle of 500ms. The cooling fan motor is rotated during that period. (The cooling fan, however, is rotated for about 8sec.) After completion of the operation, the machine returns to the sub code input window. 03 Copy lamp lighting check Used to check the operations of the copy lamp and its peripheral circuit. When this simulation is executed, the following initial menu is displayed.
(Initial window) Sim5-3 COPY LAMP OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim5-3 COPY LAMP
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for about 5sec. After passing for 5sec, the machine returns to the sub code input window. 06 01 Paper feed/transport solenoid operation check When this simulation is executed, the names of the solenoids which can be operated are displayed. Select a load to be operated with the 10-key.
(Load selection window) Sim6-1 OUTPUT CHECK 1:CPSOL 4:PSOL3 2:PSOL1 5:HPSOL 3:PSOL2 6:FSOL2 1/2 EXEC 1 10Key (Load selection window) Sim6-1 OUTPUT CHECK 1:CPSOL 4:PSOL3 2:PSOL1 5:HPSOL 3:PSOL2 6:FSOL2 1/2 EXEC 2 OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim6-1 OUTPUT CHECK 1:CPSOL 4:PSOL3 2:PSOL1 5:HPSOL 3:PSOL2 6:FSOL2 1/2 EXEC 2 During execution, the selected solenoid repeats ON/OFF 20 times for every 500ms.
1: CPSOL :Cassette 1 paper feed solenoid 2: PSOL1 :Cassette 2 paper feed solenoid (*) 3: PSOL2 :Cassette 2 paper feed solenoid (*) 4: PSOL3 :Cassette 3 paper feed solenoid (*) 5: HPSOL :Manual feed tray paper feed solenoid 6: FSOL2 :Cassette 2 transport solenoid (*) 7: FSOL3 :Cassette 3 transport solenoid (*) (*) Supported only for the model with the option installed. Skipped for the other models without installation. After completion of execution
02
Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check When this simulation is executed, the machine goes to the execution start window. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the resist roller solenoid (RRS) repeats ON of 500ms and OFF of 500ms 20 times.
(Execution start window) Sim6-2 RRS CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim6-2 RRS CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
When the operation is completed, the machine returns to the sub code input window. When [Interruption] key is pressed, the machine returns to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode.
manuals4you.com
Main code 06
Sub code 10 Main cassette semicircular roller cleaning
Contents
Remark
Before execution of this simulation, remove the developing cartridges. When this simulation is executed, the load select menu is displayed as shown below. Select a roller cassette to be cleaned with the 10-key. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the semi-circular roller of the specified cassette is rotated halfway round and stopped with the roller facing downward.
(Load selection window) Sim6-10 ROLLER CLN 1:TRAY1 4:TRAY4 2:TRAY2 3:TRAY3 EXEC 0 Sim6-10 ROLLER CLN 1:TRAY1 4:TRAY4 2:TRAY2 3:TRAY3 1/2 EXEC 2 (Execution window) Sim6-10 ROLLER CLN 1:TRAY1 4:TRAY4 2:TRAY2 3:TRAY3 EXEC 2
10Key
OK/START Key
When [Interruption] key is pressed after cleaning, the machine returns to the sub code input window and the semi-circular roller returns to the original position. * When TRAY2 - TRAY4 are not installed, they are not displayed. * When another cassette roller is cleaned continuously, press [Interruption] key to return the roller to the original position and restart the simulation. * When the simulation mode is terminated by pressing [CA] key, the roller returns to the original position by the initializing operation. 07 01 Warm-up display and aging with jam Used to measure the warm-up time and execute aging with jam. When this simulation is executed, the following warm-up window is displayed. The time required for starting the warm-up and completing the initializing operation and shifting to the standby state is displayed. After completion of warm-up, press [CA] key to exit the simulation mode, allowing normal copy operations. The copy mode at that time is the aging mode with 0sec of intermittent aging.
(Warming up window) Sim7-1 W-UP C-MODE WARMING UP. (Warming up completion window) Sim7-1 W-UP C-MODE CA WARM UP COMPLETED. (Copy window) Ready to copy. S 100% 1 10 8 1/2 11
Canceled by turning off the power or executing a simulation which makes the hardware reset. When the interruption is pressed to shift to the input standby window, the machine does not enter the aging mode. 06 Intermittent aging Used to execute intermittent aging of 3sec. The set quantity and the mode are optionally selected. When this simulation is executed, the following execution start window is displayed. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode. Enter a desired coy mode and a desired copy quantity. Press [START] key, and intermittent aging will be started.
(Execution start window) Sim7-6 INTERVAL SET AGING INTERVAL AER YOU SURE? EXEC (Copy window) Ready to copy. S 100% 8 1/2 11
It is canceled by turning off the power or executing a simulation with the hard reset.
Main code 07
Sub code 08 Shifting with warm-up display
Contents
Remark
Used to measure the warm-up time. When this simulation is executed, the following warm-up window is displayed. The time required for starting the warm-up and completing the initializing operation and shifting to the standby state is displayed. * Though [CA] key is pressed, the machine does not enter the aging mode of intermission 0 sec.
(Warming up window) Sim7-8 W-UP C-MODE WARMING UP. (Warming up completion window) Sim7-8 W-UP C-MODE WARM UP COMPLETED.
10
Press [CA] key to exit the simulation mode. (The aging function is omitted from SIM 07-01.) 08 01 Developing bias output Used to check the developing bias output. When this simulation is executed, the following execution start window is displayed. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec. When measuring the actual output value, however, use SIM 25-01. After completion of the process, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
(Execution start window) Sim8-1 DV BIAS OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim8-1 DV BIAS
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts output operation and shifts to the sib code input window. 02 Main charger output (Grid = HIGH) Used to check the main charger output. When this simulation is executed, the following execution start window is displayed. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the main charger is turned on for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH mode. After completion of the process, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
(Execution start window) Sim8-2 MHV(H) OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim8-2 MHV(H)
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts output operation and shifts to the sub code input window. 03 Main charger output (Grid = LOW) Used to check the main charger output. When this simulation is executed, the following execution start window is displayed. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the main charger is turned on for 30 sec in the grid voltage LOW mode. After completion of the process, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
(Execution start window) Sim8-3 MHV(L) OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim8-3 MHV(L)
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts output operation and shifts to the sub code input window.
manuals4you.com
Main code 08
Sub code 06 Transfer charger output
Contents
Remark
When this simulation is executed, the machine shifts to the following mode select window, and the list of the modes to be outputted is displayed. Select an output mode with 10-key and press [OK] key or [START] key, and the transfer charger output is made for about 30sec in the specified mode.
(Mode selection window) Sim8-6 TC OUTPUT 1:NML_A 4:SML_B 2:NML_B 5:BYPASS 3:SML_A EXEC 2 (Execution window) Sim8-6 TC OUTPUT OK/START Key 1:NML_A 4:SML_B 2:NML_B 5:BYPASS 3:SML_A EXEC 2
Window display 1:NML_A 2:NML_B 3:SML_A 4:SML_B
Output mode Normal size width (front) Normal size width (back) Small size width (front) Small size width (back)
* The back is not displayed when DUPEX setting is OFF. * Small size paper is Letter R (A4R) width or below. When an output is completed, the machine shifts to the mode select window. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts the output operation, and shifts to the sub code input window. 09 01 Duplex motor forward rotation check Used to check the duplex motor rotation. The duplex motor is rotated in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec. After completion of the process, the machine shifts to the sub code input window.
(Execution start window) Sim9-1 DMF CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim9-1 DMF CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts the output operation, and shifts to the sub code input window. 02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check Used to check the duplex motor reverse rotation. The duplex motor is rotated in the reverse direction for 30sec. After completion of the process, the machine shifts to the sub code input window.
(Execution start window) Sim9-2 DMR CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim9-2 DMR CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts the output operation, and shifts to the sub code input window.
Main code 09
Sub code 04 Duplex motor RPM adjustment
Contents
Remark Default: 4(646.9PPS)
Used to adjust the duplex motor rotation speed. When this simulation is executed, the following setting window is displayed. Enter an input value with 10-key and press [OK] key or [START] key. The setting range is in 1-13 steps and the default is "4" (646.9PPS).
(Setting window) Sim9-4 MOTOR SPEED 1:MOTOR SPEED 4 Set value 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 : Speed (PPS) : 637.2PPS(Slow) : 640.4PPS : 643.6PPS : 646.9PPS(Default) : 650.1PPS : 653.3PPS : 656.5PPS : 659.8PPS : 662.9PPS : 666.2PPS : 669.4PPS : 672.6PPS : 675.8PPS(Fast)
1-13]
When a value outside the setting range is inputted, it is ignored. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shift to the sub code input window. 05 Duplex motor switchback time adjustment Used to adjust the duplex motor switchback time when the motor reverse rotation is controlled. When this simulation is executed, the following setting window is displayed. Enter an input value with 10-key and press [OK] key or [START] key. The setting range is 50-76, and the default is 50. When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the distance up to reverse start is increased by 3 steps in 1-2 phase excitement.
Sim9-5 SW BACK TIME 1:SW BACK TIME 50
Default: 50
[ 50-76]
50
When a value outside the setting range is inputted, it is ignored. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shift to the sub code input window. 10 Toner motor operation Used to check the operation of the toner motor. When this simulation is executed, the following execution start window is displayed. Press [OK] key or [START] key, and the toner motor is rotated for about 30sec. After completion of the process, the machine shifts to the sub code input window.
(Execution start window) Sim10 TONER MOTOR OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim10 TONER MOTOR
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts the output operation, and shifts to the sub code input window. 14 Trouble cancel (except for U2) * Used to cancel EEPROM writing troubles such as H trouble and execute the hard reset. When this simulation is executed, the following execution start window is displayed. Press [OK] key or [START] key to clear the trouble other than U2.
(Execution start window) Sim14 TROUBLE CLEAR TROUBLE CLEAR (WITHOUT U2) AER YOU SURE? EXEC
manuals4you.com
Main code 16
Sub code U2 trouble cancel
Contents
Remark
* Used to cancel the U2 trouble and execute the hard reset. When this simulation is executed, the following execution start window is displayed. Press [OK] key or [START] key to clear the U2 trouble.
(Execution start window) Sim16 TROUBLE CLEAR U2 TROUBLE CLEAR
AER YOU SURE? EXEC
20
01
Maintenance counter clear Used to clear the maintenance counter. Press [OK] key or A[START] key on the following window, the maintenance counter is cleared and the machine returns to the sub code input window.
Sim20-1 COUNTER CLR MAINTENANCE COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
21
01
Maintenance cycle setting Used to set the maintenance cycle. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter a desired code with 10-key and press [START] key. The set value is saved in the EEPROM and the machine returns to the sub code input window.
Sim21-1 CYCLE SET. 1:MAINTE CYCLE 4 0: 5K (5,000 sheets) 1: 7.5K (7,500 sheets) 2: 10K (10,000 sheets) 3: 25K (25,000 sheets) 4: 50K (50,000 sheets) 5: FREE (999,999 sheets) (Setting range: 0 - 5, Default = 4)
Default: 4(50k)
0- 5]
Main code 22
Sub code 01 Counters display
Contents
Remark
Sim22-1 COUNTER 1/4 TOTAL :nnnnnnn MAINTE :nnnnnnn DEV :nnnnnnn(*) MIN_MNT :nnnnnnn(*) DRUM :nnnnnnn
(*) Either of the following two is displayed depending on the model. DEV: Development counter (EX Japan) MIN_MNT: Mini maintenance counter (Japan)
Sim22-1 COUNTER 2/4 CPY JOB : nnnnnnn PRT JOB : nnnnnnn SCN JOB : nnnnnnn OC SCN : nnnnnnn
Sim22-1 COUNTER 3/4 SPF : nnnnnnn DUPLEX : nnnnnnn OTHERS : nnnnnnn MNTCYC : nnnnnnn
Counter display TOTAL : Total counter MAINTE : Maintenance counter (AR model) DEV : Development counter (AR EX Japan model) MIN MNT : Mini maintenance counter (AR Japan model) DRUM : Drum counter CPY JOB : Copy job counter PRT JOB : Print job counter SCN JOB : Scan job counter OC SCN : OC scan counter SPF : SPF counter DUPLEX : DUPLEX counter OTHERS : Other counter MNTCYC : Maintenance cycle (AR model) DRM TTL :Drum rotation accumulated time MMTCYC : Mini maintenance cycle (AR Japan model)
Sim22-1 COUNTER 4/4 DRM TTL : nnnnnnn MMTCYC : nnnnnnn
Though SIM26-74 is set to 1: Scan counter is added, the count is not added to SIM22-01 total counter display. The setting affects only the total counter display in the key operator program. 03 Jam memory display Used to check the jam kind occurred in the main unit and the SPF. The kinds of jams up to 30 items are displayed sequentially from the latest one. (The oldest one is deleted sequentially.) This display is used for troubleshooting. (If there are extremely many troubles in a position, it may be judged that a repair must be executed.) The kinds and contents of jams to be displayed are as follows.
Sim22-3 JAM HIS. 1/4 XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Kinds of jams and display contents SPPD_ON : SPF paper entry sensor (Not reached) SPPD_OFF : SPF paper entry sensor (Remaining) SOUT_ON : SPF paper exit sensor (Not reached) SOUT_OFF : SPF paper exit sensor (Remaining) POUT_ON : Paper exit sensor (Not reached) POUT_OFF : Paper exit sensor (Remaining) DPX_ON : DUP sensor (Not reached) DPX_OFF : DUP sensor (Remaining) PIN_ON : Paper feed sensor (Not reached) PIN_OFF : Paper feed sensor (Remaining) PIN2_ON : Cassette 2 paper feed sensor (Not reached) PIN3_ON : Cassette 3 paper feed sensor (Not reached) PIN4_ON : Cassette 4 paper feed sensor (Not reached)
Sim22-3 JAM HIS. 2/4 XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. , keys: Switches to another page.
manuals4you.com
Main code 22
Sub code 04 Jam total counter display Used to display the jam total counter.
Sim22-4 COUNTER JAM : nnnnnn
Contents
Remark
07
Key operator code display Used to display the key operator code.
Sim22-7 KEY OPE KEY CODE: nnnnn
09
Paper feed counter display Used to display the paper feed quantity of each paper feed tray. This simulation shows the use frequency of each paper feed section. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. , keys: Switches to another page.
Sim22-9 COUNTER 1/2 BYPASS : nnnnnnn TRAY1 : nnnnnnn TRAY2 : nnnnnnn TRAY3 : nnnnnnn Key Sim22-9 COUNTER 2/2 TRAY4 : nnnnnnn
Key
* TRAY2-TRAY4 are displayed only when they are installed. 13 CRUM destination display Used to display the CRUM chip destination code saved in the EEPROM. If the display does not match the destination code saved in the CRUM chip, it is judged as an error. * This simulation is valid only for the model with the CRUM chip.
Sim22-13 CRUM CRUM TYPE nn Number 00 01 02 03 04 12 99 : Setting (Destination) : Not set. : BTA-A : BTA-B : BTA-C : BTA-E : AL series : Conversion
14
P-ROM version display

Sim22-14 ROM VER1/2 S/N : ----------MCU : --.-IMC : --.-PNL : --.-Sim22-14 ROM VER2/2 FAX : --.--
S/N MCU IMC PNL FAX
:Production serial number :Main unit program version :IMC program version :Panel program version :FAX program version
The version of the option board which is not installed is not displayed.
Main code 22
Sub code 15 Trouble memory display
Contents
Remark
The latest 20 troubles are displayed. (The oldest one is overwritten sequentially.) [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. , keys: Switches to another page.
Sim22-15 TROUBLE 1/2 XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX Key Sim22-15 TROUBLE 2/2 XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX XX-XX
Key
The display sequence is as shown below.

Sim22-15 TROUBLE 1/2 1 5 9 2 6 10 3 7 11 4 8 12
In this case, (1) is the latest one and (12) is the oldest. 22 SPF jam counter display Used to display the SPF JAM counter. When [Interruption] key is pressed, the machine goes to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode.
Sim22-22 JAM CNT SPF : nnnnnnn
24
01
Jam total counter clear When this simulation is executed, the clear confirmation window is displayed as shown below. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the jam total count and the jam memory are cleared and the machine shifts to the sub code input window.
Sim24-1 COUNTER CLR JAM COUNTER CLEAR
AER YOU SURE? EXEC
02
Trouble memory clear Used to clear the trouble memory and the trouble history data in the EEPROM. When [Interruption] key is pressed, the machine shifts to the sub code input window. When [CA] key is pressed, the machine exits the simulation mode.
Sim24-2 COUNTER CLR TROUBLE COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
04
SPF counter clear Used to clear the SPF paper feed counter.
Sim24-4 COUNTER CLR SPF COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window.
manuals4you.com
Main code 24
Sub code 05 Duplex print counter clear Used to clear the duplex print counter.
Sim24-5 COUNTER CLR DUPLEX COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
Contents
Remark
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 06 Paper feed counter clear Used to clear the paper feed counter data in each paper feed section.
(Initial window Sim24-6 COUNTER CLR 1:BYPASS 4:TRAY3 2:TRAY1 5:TRAY4 3:TRAY2 0 10 Key (Counter selection window) Sim24-6 COUNTER CLR 1:BYPASS 4:TRAY3 2:TRAY1 5:TRAY4 3:TRAY2 2 OK/START (Confirmation window) Sim24-6 COUNTER CLR 1:BYPASS 4:TRAY3 2:TRAY1 5:TRAY4 3:TRAY2 ARE YOU SURE? 2
C Key
Return
OK/START
* TRAY2-TRAY4 are displayed only when they are installed. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 07 Drum counter clear Used to clear the drum counter and the drum rotating time.
Sim24-7 COUNTER CLR DRUM COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 08 Copy counter clear Used to clear the copy counter.
Sim24-8 COUNTER CLR COPIES COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
[OK] or [START] key: Clears the copy counter and shifts to the sub code input window. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 09 Printer counter clear Used to clear the printer counter and other counters. Select a counter to be cleared and press [OK] key or [START] key. The confirmation window is displayed. Press [OK] key or [START] key again, and the specified counter is cleared and the machine returns to the initial window.
10-key input Sim24-9 COUNTER CLR 1:PRINT 2:OTHER 1 Sim24-9 COUNTER CLR 1:PRINT 2:OTHER ARE YOU SURE? 1
OK/START
Return
OK/START(Counter clear)
Main code 24
Sub code 13 Scanner counter clear Used to clear the scanner counter.
Sim24-13 COUNTER CLR SCAN COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
Contents
Remark
[OK] or [START] key: Clears the scanner counter and shifts to the sub code input window. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 14 SPF jam total counter clear Used to clear the SPF jam total counter.
Sim24-14 COUNTER CLR SPF JAM COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
[OK] or [START] key: Clears the SPF jam total counter and shifts to the sub code input window. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 15 Scanner mode counter clear Used to clear the scanner mode counter.
Sim24-15 COUNTER CLR SCANNER MODE COUNTER CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
[OK] or [START] key: Clears the scanner mode counter and shifts to the sub code input window. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 25 01 Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check) When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the main motor (as well as the duplex motor in the case of the duplex model) is rotated for 30 sec. If the developing unit is installed to save toner consumption at that time, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted. In addition, since laser discharge is required when the motor is stopped, the polygon motor is also operated. Check if the developing unit is installed or not. If it is not installed, the previous high voltage is not outputted and only the motor is rotated. After completion of 30sec operation, the machine shifts to the sub code input window. * This simulation must not be executed with the door open/close switch forcibly turned ON.
(Execution start window) Sim25-1 MAIN MOTOR OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim25-1 MAIN MOTOR
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
After completion of the process, the machine shifts to the sub code input window. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts the output operation, and shifts to the sub code input window.
manuals4you.com
Main code 25
Sub code 10 Polygon motor operation check
Contents
Remark
When [OK] or [START] is pressed, the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec.
(Execution start window) Sim25-10 LSU CHECK OK/START Key (Execution window) Sim25-10 LSU CHECK
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
After completion of the process, the machine shifts to the sub code input window. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Interrupts the output operation, and shifts to the sub code input window. 26 01 Job separator setting Used to set YES/NO of installation of the hob separator. After installation of the job separator, setting must be manually set to YES.
Sim26-1 JBS SET 1:JOB SEPARATOR 0 0=NONE 1=SEPARATOR 0 [ 0-1] 0 : No job separator 1 : Job separator provided
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. (When setting is changed, the machine exits the simulation mode and performs the hard reset.) [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. (When setting is changed, it is invalid.) [START] key: Setting contents are saved in the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the code input window. (When setting is changed, the machine does not shift to the code input window.) 02 Size setting Used to set Enable/Disable of FC (8.5" x 13") size detection. Detection size when FC (8.5" x 13") size document is used. Unit to be used Document SPF Destination EX Japan AB series(FC) Inch series(FC) Document size 0(Disable) FC(8.5"x13") B4 FC(8.5"x13") LG(8.5"x14") B4 B4 LG(8.5"x14") LG(8.5"x14") Set value 1(Enable) FC(8.5"x13") FC(8.5"x13") FC(8.5"x13") FC(8.5"x13") Default: 00
* For destinations other than the above, this setting is invalid.

Sim26-2 SIZE SET 1:B4/LG,FC 0=B4/LG 1=FC [ 0-1] 0 Code: Setting 0 : Detection disabled (Default for destinations other than below) 1 : FC detection enabled (Default for SCA/Philippines)
03
Auditor setting Used to set the auditor.

Sim26-3 AUDITOR SET 0 1:AUDITOR 0=P10 1=VENDOR 2=OTHER 0 [ 0-2] Code: Mode 0 : Built-in auditor mode 1 : Coin vendor 2 : Other
Default: 0 (P10)
* When the coin vendor mode is selected: 1. Sort auto select is OFF. 2. For Japan, the duplex copy use inhibition setting is ON (inhibited). 3. When the auditor mode exclusive-setting is ON (manual paper feed inhibited) and the standard tray is set to the manual feed tray, the standard tray setting is set to the main tray.
Main code 26
Sub code 04 Copier duplex setting
Contents
Remark
Used to set YES/NO of duplex setting. This must be set to ON when the duplex unit is installed. If this setting is set to OFF on the duplex machine, the duplex motor dose not rotate and paper is not discharged normally, resulting in a paper jam.
Sim26-4 DUPLEX SET 0 1:DUPLEX 0=OFF 1=ON [ 0-1] 0 Code: Duplex setting 0 : OFF 1 : ON
05
Count mode setting Used to set the count-up number of the total counter, the developer counter, and the maintenance counter individually when a special paper (A3/WLT/8K) is passed. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Sim26-5 COUNT MODE 1 1:COUNT MODE
Default: 0 (+2)
[ 0-3]
Setting 0 1 2 3
Total/Developer +2 +1 +2 +1
Maintenance +2 +2 +1 +1
[1]-[3] (Default:[0]) Enter a value with 10-key, and press [OK] key or [START] key to save the current adjustment value to the EEPROM. The machine returns to the sub code input window. 06 Destination setting Used to set the destination of the main unit. When this simulation is executed, the code number of currently set destination is displayed.
Sim26-6 DESTINATION 0 1:DESTINATION 0=JAPAN [ 0-6] 0 Code :Setting 0=JAPAN : Japan AB series 1=INCH : Inch series 2=AB : Ex Japan AB series 3=INCH(FC) : Ex Japan inch series (FC) 4=AB(FC) : Ex Japan AB series (FC) 5=CHINESE : China (EX Japan AB series + Chinese paper support) 6=TAIPEI : Taiwan (EX Japan AB series + Chinese paper support) (Setting range 0 - 6)
Default: 1
[0] - [6] (Default: Depends on the model.) Enter a value with 10-key, and press [OK] key or [START] key, and the current adjustment value is saved in the EEPROM. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. (When setting is changed, the machine exits the simulation mode and performs the hard reset.) [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. (When setting is changed, it is invalid.) [START] key: Setting contents are saved in the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the code input window. (When setting is changed, the machine does not shift to the code input window.) * When this setting is changed, the following adjustment values and the set values are automatically changed according to the set destination. O SIM46-19 ( table setting) O SIM46-30 (AE limit setting) O Paper size (A4 for AB series, LT for inch series) O Maintenance cycle (Returns to the default (Japan/Ex Japan). ) O Mini maintenance cycle (Only when setting is changed to Japan.)
manuals4you.com
Main code 26
Sub code 07 Machine condition check
Contents
Remark
When this simulation is executed, the copy speed of the machine is displayed.
Sim26-7 CPM CHECK 16CPM Displayed CPM list 14CPM 16CPM 20CPM
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 18 Toner save mode setting Used to switch ON/OFF of the toner save mode. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter a set value with 10-key and press [OK] key or [START] key. The set value is saved in the EEPROM. * When this setting is changed, the toner save setting of the key operator program is also changed accordingly.
Sim26-18 TONER SAVE 1:TONER SV MODE 0 0=OFF 1=ON [ 0-1] 0 Code: Setting 0: Toner save OFF 1: Toner save ON
Default: 0 (Toner save OFF)
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 20 Job separator paper exit mode setting Used to set the paper exit mode of the job separator. * The purpose is to allow the simplified check when the job separator option is installed. It is valid only during the adjustment simulation. Without installing a printer or a FAX machine, paper is discharged to the upper stage to check if there is no problem or not. If SIM26-01 is set to "Job separator not installed," paper is discharged to the lower stage regardless of this setting.
Sim26-20 JOBSEP OUT 0 1:JOBSEP OUT 0=OFF 1=ON [ 0-1] 0 Code: Setting 0: Lower tray 1: Upper tray
Default: 0 (OFF)
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 22 Language setting clear Used to clear the language setting. The scanner head is shifted to the fixing lock position. (1) Initial display
Sim26-22 LANGUAGE LANGUAGE SETTING CLEAR AER YOU SURE? EXEC
(2) Press [OK]or [START] key.(Execution is starred.)

Sim26-22 LANGUAGE LANGUAGE SETTING CLEAR EXEC
(3) After completion of counter clear and shifting to the lock position
Sim26-22 LANGUAGE
PLEASE SHUT OFF THE POWER.
Main code 26
Sub code 30 CE mark conformity control ON/OFF
Contents
Remark Default: 1 (ON)
Used to set Yes/No of CE mark conformity. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter a value with 10-key and press [OK] key or [START] key. The set value is saved to EEPROM and the machine returns to the sub code input window.
Sim26-30 CE MARK 1:CE MARK CTRL 0 0=OFF 1=ON [ 0-1] 0 Code: Setting 0 : CE mark support control OFF (*Default of 100V series) 1 : CE mark support control ON (*Default of 200V)
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 31 Auditor mode exclusive setup Used to set whether paper feed is allowed from the manual paper feed tray of not when the auditor is set to the coin vendor mode.
Sim26-31 AUDITOR 1:AUDITOR 1 Code: Setting 0 : Exclusive setting OFF (Manual paper feed enable) 1 : Exclusive setting ON (Manual paper feed disable) (Default) 2 : Exclusive setting OFF (Manual paper feed enable) + A3/WLT charge
Default: 1 (ON)
[ 0-2]
* When this setting is set to ON, if the auditor mode is the coin vendor mode and the standard tray setting is set to the manual paper feed tray, the standard tray setting is set to the main tray. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 36 Cancel of stop at maintenance life over Used to set YES/NO of cancel of stop when the maintenance counter life is over.
Sim26-36 MAINTESTOP 1:MAINTE OVER 1 Code: Setting 0 : Stop 1 : Stop cancel (Default)
Default: 1 (Stop cancel)
[ 0-1]
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 37 Cancel of stop at developer life over Used to set YES/NO of cancel of stop when the developer counter life is over.
Sim26-37 DEVE STOP 1:DEV LIFE OVER 1 Code: Setting 0 : Stop 1 : Stop cancel (Default)
[ 0-1]
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 39 Memory capacity check Used to check the capacity of the image memory (SDRAM) installed to the MCU PWB and the capacity of the IMC compression memory.
Sim26-39 MEMORY CHK MCU : 32Mbyte IMC : 16Mbyte
There are two kinds of the displayed image memory capacity: 16MB and 32MB. The standard capacity of the IMC compression memory is 16B. * It is not displayed when IMC is not installed. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window.
manuals4you.com
Main code 26
Sub code 42 Transfer ON/OFF timing control setting
Contents
Remark
Default: 38 (TC ON) Used to set the ON/OF timing of the transfer charger (TC) individually. Select an item to be changed with the 50 (TC OFF) cross key, and change the set value to a desired value, and press [OK] key or [START] key. The entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the sub code input window.
(Item selection) Sim26-42 TC TIMING 1:TC(ON) 38 2:TC(OFF) 50 [ 1- 99] Key 50 (Value input) Sim26-42 TC TIMING 1:TC(ON) 38 2:TC(OFF) 50 [ 1- 99] 60 2 (Settlement) Sim26-42 TC TIMING 1:TC(ON) 60 2:TC(OFF) 50 [ 1- 99] 60
10 Key
OK/START Key
Variation in the adjustment value 1:TC(ON) PS release Set value 99 50 38 1 Time (ms) 442 344 320 246 TC ON Difference (ms) +122 +24 Default -74 Set value 99 51 49 1 2:TC(OFF) PIN OFF 402 306 302 206 TC OFF Difference (ms) +98 +2 -2 -98 Time (ms)
* Setting range is 1 - 99. When the set value is increased by 1, the timing is increased by 2ms. * The default (38) of transfer ON timing means 320ms from PS release. The default (50) of the transfer OFF timing means304ms from P-IN OFF. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 43 Side void amount setting Used to set the left and right side void amounts. The left side void amount and the right side void amount can be set individually. Select an item to be changed with the cross key and change the set value to a desired value. The setting range is 0-10. When the value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by 0.5mm. The default is 5 (= 2.5mm).
(Item selection) Sim26-43 SIDE VOID 1:SIDE VOID(L) 3 2:SIDE VOID(R) 3 [ 0- 10] Key 3 (Value input) Sim26-43 SIDE VOID 1:SIDE VOID(L) 3 2:SIDE VOID(R) 3 [ 0- 10] 4 2 (Settlement) Sim26-43 SIDE VOID 1:SIDE VOID(L) 4 2:SIDE VOID(R) 3 [ 0- 10] 4
Default: 5 (Voide amount: 2.5mm)
10 Key
OK/START Key
Display: Set item 1:SIDE BOID(L) : Left side void amount setting 2:SIDE VOID(R) : Right side void amount setting [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window.
Main code 26
Sub code 51 Copy temporary stop function setting
Contents
Remark Default: 1 (Temporary stop)
Used to set whether copying is stopped temporarily when the paper exit tray full is detected. When the electronic sort function is used, paper exit of 250 sheets (*1) or more can be used for one copy job. If, at that time, copying (paper discharge) is continued with the tray full, a paper exit jam may occur. To avoid this, copying is temporarily stopped by this setting.
Sim26-51 COPY STOP 1:COPIES STOP 0 0=NON STOP 1=STOP [ 0-1] 1 Display: Setting 0 : Temporary stop cancel 1 : Temporary stop (Default)
(*1) 150 sheets when the job separator is installed. [CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 54 LCD contrast PWM duty setting Used to set the PWM duty (brightness) at the center value of LCD contrast. * Setting range: 30-70(Default: 50) * When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed, the set value of LCD contrast is immediately reflected.
Sim26-54 LCD DUTY 1:LCD PWM DUTY 50
Default: 50
[ 30- 70]
50
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 60 FAX mode key Enable/Disable setting Used to set Enable/Disable of the FAX mode key when the FAX PWB is not installed. Though this setting is set to Enable, if the FAX PWB is not installed, a message of "FAX PWB is not installed" is displayed. * When the FAX PWB is installed, the display shifts to the FAX window regardless of this setting.
Sim26-60 FAX KEY 1:FAX KEY MODE
Default: 0 (Enable)
0-
1]
FAX PWB Setting (Enable) (Disable) Yes FAX window display FAX window display No FAX not-installed display Error beep sound
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 73 Toner save setting display/non-display Used to set Enable/Disable of the toner save setting in the key operator program. If this setting is set to Enable (1), the toner save setting appears in the key operator program to allow setting.
Sim26-73 TS ENABLE 1:TS ENABLE 0 Display: Setting 0 : Disable 1 : Enable
Default: 01(Enable)
0- 1]
manuals4you.com
Main code 26
Sub code 74 Total counter display change setting
Contents
Remark Default: 0 (Scan counter not added)
Used to set whether the scanner counter value is added to the total counter display in the key operator program.
Sim26-74 ADD COUNT 1:ADD SCAN CNT 0 0 : Scan counter not added 1 : Scan counter added
0- 1]
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 30 01 Paper sensor status display Used to display the list of paper sensor status on the LCD. An active sensor is highlighted. The display items and corresponding sensors are shown below.
Sim30-1 SENSOR POUT DPX PIN MBEMP C1EMP C2EMP C3EMP C4EMP C2PSS C3PSS C4PSS DRST Display POUT DPX PIN MBEMP C1EMP C2EMP C3EMP C4EMP C2PSS C3PSS C4PSS DRST : Corresponding sensor : Paper exit sensor : DUPLEX sensor : Paper entry sensor : Manual feed paper sensor : No. 1 tray paper sensor : No. 2 tray paper sensor : No. 3 tray paper sensor : No. 4 tray paper sensor : No. 2 tray paper feed sensor : No. 3 tray paper feed sensor : No. 4 tray paper feed sensor : New drum sensor (AL model only)
When a multi-stage cassette is not installed as an option, the corresponding sensor name is not displayed. 41 01 Document size detection photo sensor check Used to check the operation of the document sensor. When this simulation is executed, the status of the document sensor is displayed. An active sensor display is highlighted.
Sim41-1 PD SENSOR OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5
OC cover open/close sensor status OCSW Open Highlighted Close Normal display PD1 - PD5
Document sensor status Document NO Document YES Normal display Highlighted
* For AB series, PD1-PD5; for inch series, PD1 - PD4.
Main code 41
Sub code 02
Contents Document size detection photo sensor detection level adjustment When this simulation is executed, the detection level of the OC document size detection sensor is displayed. (Real time display) Place white paper of A3 or WLT on the document table and press [OK] key or START key with the OC cover open. When [START] key is pressed, "EXEC" is highlighted and the document detection level at that moment is saved in the EEPROM. (The saved value is used as the reference for the following document size detection control.)
Execution window Sim41-2 PD SENSOR OCS 1[128] 200 2[128] 200 3[128] 200 4[128] 200 5[128] 200 AB series 5 4 1 2 3 1 2 Inch series 4 3
Remark
The values are displayed in the range of 0 - 255. 0 (Black) - 255 (White) The value in [ ] indicates the adjustment threshold value. "EXEC" is highlighted during execution. OCSW Original cover status Open: Highlighted Close: Normal display PD sensor detection level
1-5 03
Document size detection photo sensor light receiving/detection level check When this simulation is executed, the light receiving level of the document detection photo sensor is displayed. (Real time display) The values in parentheses of sensor 4 and 5 are the threshold values of adjustment at SIM41-04. Since sensors 1 and 3 are not provide with the threshold value of detection at SIM41-04, "0" is always displayed.
Sim41-3 PD SENSOR OCS 1[000] 200 2[000] 200 3[000] 200 4[050] 200 5[050] 200
04
Detection level adjustment when the document size is settled (15 degrees - 20 degrees) Set the OC cover to the document size settled state (15 degrees - 20 degrees), and press [OK] key.
1 Initial window Sim41-4 20 SENSOR 2 After-execution window Sim41-4 20 SENSOR OCS 1[000] 163 2[000] 148 3[001] 167 4[0C6] 180 5[197] 179
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
The detection level under the document size settled state is saved in the EEPROM, and the value is displayed in [ ]. * The document size settled state means the point when the open/close sensor (OCSW) is switched from ON (highlighted) to OFF (normal display). 42 01 Developing counter clear Used to clear the developing counter. When this simulation is executed, the confirmation window is displayed to confirm to clear or not. To clear, press [OK] key or [START] key. Not to clear, press [Interruption] key or [CA] key to exit the simulation mode.
Sim42-1 COUNTER CLR DEVELOPER COUNTER CLEAR ARE YOU SURE? EXEC
manuals4you.com
Main code 43
Sub code 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy)
Contents
Remark Default: 2(170C)
Used to set the fusing temperature in normal copy. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the set value is increased by 5C from the current display temperature. Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the set value is decreased by 5C from the current display temperature. Enter a desired set value (temperature), and press [OK] key or [START] key. The set value is caved in the EEPROM. Setting can be made in the range of 160C to 200C in the increment of 5C.
Sim43-1 FUSER TEMP. 1:FUSER TEMP 170 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 : 160 C : 165 C : 170 C (Default) : 175 C : 180 C : 185 C : 190 C : 195 C : 200 C
[160- 200]
170
[CA] key: Exits the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 12 Standby mode fusing fan rotation setting When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Select a mode to be changed with the cross key and enter a set value with 10-key. Enter the mode number to be selected with 10-key and press [OK] key or [START] key. The set value is saved in the EEPROM.
Sim43-12 FAN SPEED 1:LOW 0 2:HIGH 1 [ 0-1] 0 FAN rotation speed 0 : Low speed rotation 1 : High speed rotation
Default: LOW:0(Low speed rotation) HIGH:1(High speed rotation)
Setting mode LOW HIGH 13 Setting in normal temperature adjustment (190C or below) Default = 0 (Low speed rotation) When the fusing temperature is 190C or above,Default = 1 (High speed rotation) Default: 0 (Disadble)
Fusing paper interval control allow/inhibit setting Used to change the paper feed timing of 21st sheet or later to A3 or WLT (depending on the destination setting) when in multi copy/print of narrow width sheets. When this simulation is executed, the current set number is displayed. Enter a code number and press [START] key. The entered number is saved in the EEPROM and the machine returns to the sub code input window.
Sim43-13 PICK INTVL 1:PICK INTVL 0 Code: Setting 0: Disable (Default) 1: Enable
[ 0-1]
<Applicable paper> 1) Cassette paper feed: A4R,B5R,8-1/2"x14",8-1/2"x13",8-1/2"x11",A5,INV 2) Manual paper feed: A4R,B5R,8-1/2"x14",8-1/2"x13",8-1/2"x11",A5,INV,16KR * A5 is applicable to manual paper fed only in EX Japan AB series.
Main code 44
Sub code 34 Transfer current setting
Contents
Remark
Default: 21(NML R, SML R) Used to set the transfer current value. When this simulation is executed, the list of modes and the current set 22(NML F, SML F, value are displayed on the LCD. BYPASS)
Sim44-34 TC ADJ. 1:NML F 22 2:NML R 21 3:SML F 22 1/2 [ 9- 36] 22 Sim44-34 TC 4:SML R 5:BYPASS 2/2 [ ADJ. 21 22 22
9- 36]
Select a set item with the cross key and enter a set value with 10-key. Press [OK] key or [START] key, and the set value is saved in the EEPROM. The setting range is 90A - 360A. The calculation formula is "Set value x 10 (A)." For example, in order to set the transfer current value to 200A, set the adjustment value to "20." Display mode NML F NML R SML F SML R BYPASS [ ]: Default * Small size paper means A4R (Letter R) width or less. * When selecting the special size of tray, the normal size width setting is made. 40 Setting of rotation time before toner supply Used to set the time from starting rotation of the main motor to starting toner supply when initializing after turning on the power.
Sim44-40 TONER 1:ROTATE TIME
: Setting mode : Normal size paper (Front) [22] : Normal size paper (Back) [21] : Small size paper (Front) [22] : Small size paper (Back) [21] : Manual paper pass [22]
Default: 8sec
[ 1-
99]
[1] - [99] (Default : [8] (Unit: sec)) Enter a set value with10-key and press [START] key. The set value is saved in theEEPROM and the machine returns to the sub code input window. 46 01 Copy density adjustment(300dpi) Used to set the copy density foe each exposure mode. When this simulation is executed, the list of the setting items and the current set value are displayed. Select an item to be changed with [ ] and [ ] keys and enter the adjustment value with 10-key. The setting range is 1 - 99. When [ ] or [ ] key is pressed, the page is changed,. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. The entered value is saved in the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy window. Sample copying can be performed during the simulation
Sim46-1 EXP LEVEL 1:AE 50 2:TEXT 50 3:PHOTO 1 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50 Sim46-1 EXP LEVEL 4:PHOTO 2 50 5:TEXT(TS) 50 6:AE(TS) 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50
Window display 1:AE 2:TEXT 3:PHOTO 1 4:PHOTO 2 5:TEXT (TS) 6:AE (TS)
: Adjustment mode : AE MODE (300dpi) : TEXT MODE (300dpi) : PHOTO MODE (Error diffusion) : PHOTO MODE (Dither) : TS MODE (TEXT) (300dpi) : TS MODE (AE) (300dpi)
manuals4you.com
Main code 46
Sub code 02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) Used to set the copy density for each mode.
Sim46-2 EXP. LEVEL 1:AE 50 2:TEXT 50 3:PHOTO 1 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50
Contents
Remark
Sim46-2 EXP. LEVEL 4:PHOTO 2 50 5:TEXT(TS) 50 6:AE(TS) 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50
Window display 1:AE 2:TEXT 3:PHOTO 1 4:PHOTO 2 5:TEXT (TS) 6:AE (TS)
: Adjustment mode : AE MODE (600dpi) : TEXT MODE (300dpi) : PHOTO MODE (Error diffusion) : PHOTO MODE (Dither) : TS MODE (TEXT) (600dpi) : TS MODE (AE) (600dpi)
Used to set the copy density for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the list of the setting items and the current set value are displayed. Select an item to be changed with [ ] and [ ] keys and enter the adjustment value with 10-key. The setting range is 1 - 99. When [ ] or [ ] key is pressed, the page is changed. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. The entered value is saved in the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy window. Sample copying can be performed during the simulation.
Main code 46
Sub code 09
Contents Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Text) 300dpi
Remark
The value on the example (50) is not Used to adjust the shift amount and the slanting value for each density level of 1-5 when the exposure mode the default value. is TEXT (including TS). For the shift amount, the gamma (gradation) is common. The whole sections are made brighter or darker. When the shift amount is increased, the brightness is decreased. When the shift amount is decreased, the brightness is increased. The slanting value changes the gamma (gradation). When the set value is increased, the gamma is increased to provide a higher contrast. (Clear black and white) When the set value is decreased, the gamma is decreased to provide a lower contrast. (Higher gradation) Select an adjustment mode with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. The adjustment range is 1 - 99. When [ ] or [ ] key is pressed, the page is changed. The shift amount and the slanting value can be individually set for each of five levels of density for each of TEXT/TS and TEXT. Therefore, there are 20 patterns of adjustment modes.
Sim46-9 TEXT 300 1:1.0(SHIFT) 2:1.0(GAMMA) 3:2.0(SHIFT) 1/7 [ 1- 99] 50 50 50 50 Sim46-9 TEXT 300 4:2.0(GAMMA) 5:3.0(SHIFT) 6:3.0(GAMMA) 2/7 [ 1- 99] 50 50 50 50 Sim46-9 TEXT 300 7:4.0(SHIFT) 8:4.0(GAMMA) 9:5.0(SHIFT) 3/7 [ 1- 99] 50 50 50 50
Sim46-9 TEXT 300 10:5.0(GAMMA) 11:TS 1.0(SHIFT) 12:TS 1.0(GAMMA) 4/7 [ 1- 99]
50 50 50 50
Sim46-9 TEXT 300 13:TS 2.0(SHIFT) 14:TS 2.0(GAMMA) 15:TS 3.0(SHIFT) 5/7 [ 1- 99]
50 50 50 50
Sim46-9 TEXT 300 16:TS 3.0(GAMMA) 17:TS 4.0(SHIFT) 18:TS 4.0(GAMMA) 6/7 [ 1- 99]
50 50 50 50
Sim46-9 TEXT 300 19:TS 5.0(SHIFT) 50 20:TS 5.0(GAMMA) 50 7/7 [ 1- 99] 50
1: 1.0(SHIFT) 2: 1.0(GAMMA) 3: 2.0(SHIFT) 4: 2.0(GAMMA) 5: 3.0(SHIFT) 6: 3.0(GAMMA) 7: 4.0(SHIFT) 8: 4.0(GAMMA) 9: 5.0(SHIFT) 10: 5.0(GAMMA) 11: TS 1.0(SHIFT) 12: TS 1.0(GAMMA) 13: TS 2.0(SHIFT) 14: TS 2.0(GAMMA) 15: TS 3.0(SHIFT) 16: TS 3.0(GAMMA) 17: TS 4.0(SHIFT) 18: TS 4.0(GAMMA) 19: TS 5.0(SHIFT) 20: TS 5.0(GAMMA)
TEXT density 1 shift amount TEXT density 1 gamma value TEXT density 2 shift amount TEXT density 2 gamma value TEXT density 3 shift amount TEXT density 3 gamma value TEXT density 4 shift amount TEXT density 4 gamma value TEXT density 5 shift amount TEXT density 5 gamma value TS TEXT density 1 shift amount TS TEXT density 1 gamma value TS TEXT density 2 shift amount TS TEXT density 2 gamma value TS TEXT density 3 shift amount TS TEXT density 3 gamma value TS TEXT density 4 shift amount TS TEXT density 4 gamma value TS TEXT density 5 shift amount TS TEXT density 5 gamma value
Select an item to be changed and set a desired adjustment value. Press [OK] key, and the machine shifts to the copy window. When [START] key is pressed at that time, copying is performed with the previous adjustment value and the result can be checked.
manuals4you.com
Main code 46
Sub code 10
Contents Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Text) 600dpi
Remark
The value on the example (50) is not Used to adjust the shift amount and the slanting value for each density level (1-5) when the exposure model the default value. is TEXT (including TS). For the shift amount, the gamma (gradation) is common. The whole sections are made brighter or darker. When the shift amount is increased, the brightness is decreased. When the shift amount is decreased, the brightness is increased. The slanting value changes the gamma (gradation). When the set value is increased, the gamma is increased to provide a higher contrast. (Clear black and white) When the set value is decreased, the gamma is decreased to provide a lower contrast. (Higher gradation) Select an adjustment mode with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. The adjustment range is 1 - 99. When [ ] or [ ] key is pressed, the page is changed. The shift amount and the slanting value can be individually set for each of five levels of density for each of TEXT/TS and TEXT. Therefore, there are 20 patterns of adjustment modes.
Sim46-10 TEXT 600 1:1.0(SHIFT) 2:1.0(GAMMA) 3:2.0(SHIFT) 1/7 [ 1- 99] 50 50 50 50 Sim46-10 TEXT 600 4:2.0(GAMMA) 5:3.0(SHIFT) 6:3.0(GAMMA) 2/7 [ 1- 99] 50 50 50 50 Sim46-10 TEXT 600 7:4.0(SHIFT) 8:4.0(GAMMA) 9:5.0(SHIFT) 3/7 [ 1- 99] 50 50 50 50
Sim46-10 TEXT 600 10:5.0(GAMMA) 11:TS 1.0(SHIFT) 12:TS 1.0(GAMMA) 4/7 [ 1- 99]
50 50 50 50
Sim46-10 TEXT 600 13:TS 2.0(SHIFT) 14:TS 2.0(GAMMA) 15:TS 3.0(SHIFT) 5/7 [ 1- 99]
50 50 50 50
Sim46-10 TEXT 600 16:TS 3.0(GAMMA) 17:TS 4.0(SHIFT) 18:TS 4.0(GAMMA) 6/7 [ 1- 99]
50 50 50 50
Sim46-10 TEXT 600 19:TS 5.0(SHIFT) 50 20:TS 5.0(GAMMA) 50 7/7 [ 1- 99] 50
1: 1.0(SHIFT) 2: 1.0(GAMMA) 3: 2.0(SHIFT) 4: 2.0(GAMMA) 5: 3.0(SHIFT) 6: 3.0(GAMMA) 7: 4.0(SHIFT) 8: 4.0(GAMMA) 9: 5.0(SHIFT) 10: 5.0(GAMMA) 11: TS 1.0(SHIFT) 12: TS 1.0(GAMMA) 13: TS 2.0(SHIFT) 14: TS 2.0(GAMMA) 15: TS 3.0(SHIFT) 16: TS 3.0(GAMMA) 17: TS 4.0(SHIFT) 18: TS 4.0(GAMMA) 19: TS 5.0(SHIFT) 20: TS 5.0(GAMMA)
TEXT density 1 shift amount TEXT density 1 gamma value TEXT density 2 shift amount TEXT density 2 gamma value TEXT density 3 shift amount TEXT density 3 gamma value TEXT density 4 shift amount TEXT density 4 gamma value TEXT density 5 shift amount TEXT density 5 gamma value TS TEXT density 1 shift amount TS TEXT density 1 gamma value TS TEXT density 2 shift amount TS TEXT density 2 gamma value TS TEXT density 3 shift amount TS TEXT density 3 gamma value TS TEXT density 4 shift amount TS TEXT density 4 gamma value TS TEXT density 5 shift amount TS TEXT density 5 gamma value
Main code 46
Sub code 11
Contents Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Photo) 600dpi
Remark
The value on the example (50) is not Used to adjust the shift amount and the slanting value for each density level (1-5) when the exposure model the default value. is PHOTO (error diffusion and dither). For the shift amount, the gamma (gradation) is common. The whole sections are made brighter or darker. When the shift amount is increased, the brightness is decreased. When the shift amount is decreased, the brightness is increased. The slanting value changes the gamma (gradation). When the set value is increased, the gamma is increased to provide a higher contrast. (Clear black and white) When the set value is decreased, the gamma is decreased to provide a lower contrast. (Higher gradation) Select an adjustment mode with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. The adjustment range is 1 - 99. When [ ] or [ ] key is pressed, the page is changed. The shift amount and the slanting value can be individually set for each of five levels of density for each of PHOTO mode (error diffusion and dither). Therefore, there are 20 patterns of adjustment modes. 1: ED 1.0(SHIFT) 2: 1.0(GAMMA) 3: ED 2.0(SHIFT) 4: ED 2.0(GAMMA) 5: ED 3.0(SHIFT) 6: ED 3.0(GAMMA) 7: ED 4.0(SHIFT) 8: ED 4.0(GAMMA) 9: ED 5.0(SHIFT) 10: ED 5.0(GAMMA) 11: DI 1.0(SHIFT) 12: DI 1.0(GAMMA) 13: DI 2.0(SHIFT) 14: DI 2.0(GAMMA) 15: DI 3.0(SHIFT) 16: DI 3.0(GAMMA) 17: DI 4.0(SHIFT) 18: DI 4.0(GAMMA) 19: DI 5.0(SHIFT) 20: DI 5.0(GAMMA)
Sim46-11 PHOTO 600 1:ED 1.0(SHIFT) 50 2:ED 1.0(GAMMA) 50 3:ED 2.0(SHIFT) 50 1/7 [ 1- 99] 50
PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 1 shift amount PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 1 gamma value PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 2 shift amount PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 2 gamma value PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 3 shift amount PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 3 gamma value PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 4 shift amount PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 4 gamma value PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 5 shift amount PHOTO (Error diffusion) density 5 gamma value PHOTO (Dither) density 1 shift amount PHOTO (Dither) density 1 gamma value PHOTO (Dither) density 2 shift amount PHOTO (Dither) density 2 gamma value PHOTO (Dither) density 3 shift amount PHOTO (Dither) density 3 gamma value PHOTO (Dither) density 4 shift amount PHOTO (Dither) density 4 gamma value PHOTO (Dither) density 5 shift amount HOTO (Dither) density 5 gamma value
Sim46-11 PHOTO 600 4:ED 2.0(GAMMA) 50 5:ED 3.0(SHIFT) 50 6:ED 3.0(GAMMA) 50 2/7 [ 1- 99] 50 Sim46-11 PHOTO 600 7:ED 4.0(SHIFT) 50 8:ED 4.0(GAMMA) 50 9:ED 5.0(SHIFT) 50 3/7 [ 1- 99] 50
Sim46-11 PHOTO 600 10:ED 5.0(GAMMA) 50 11:DI 1.0(SHIFT) 50 12:DI 1.0(GAMMA) 50 4/7 [ 1- 99] 50
Sim46-11 PHOTO 600 13:DI 2.0(SHIFT) 50 14:DI 2.0(GAMMA) 50 15:DI 3.0(SHIFT) 50 5/7 [ 1- 99] 50
Sim46-11 PHOTO 600 16:DI 3.0(GAMMA) 50 17:DI 4.0(SHIFT) 50 18:DI 4.0(GAMMA) 50 6/7 [ 1- 99] 50
Sim46-11 PHOTO 600 19:DI 5.0(SHIFT) 50 20:DI 5.0(GAMMA) 50 7/7 [ 1- 99] 50
manuals4you.com
Main code 46
Sub code 18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi)
Contents
Remark
Used to set the contrast for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the list of the setting items and the current set value are displayed. Select an item to be changed with [ ] and [ ] keys, and enter an adjustment value with 10-key. The setting range is 1 - 99. When [ ] or [ ] key is pressed, the page can be changed. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. Though copying is made only at density 3, the contrast levels at density 1 from density 5 are also changed accordingly. Window display 1:AE 2:TEXT 3:PHOTO 1 4:PHOTO 2 5:TEXT (TS) 6:AE (TS) : Adjustment mode : AE MODE (300dpi) : TEXT MODE (300dpi) : PHOTO MODE (Error diffusion) : PHOTO MODE (Dither) : TS MODE (TEXT) (300dpi) : TS MODE (AE) (300dpi)
Sim46-18 GAMMA SET. 4:PHOTO 2 50 5:TEXT(TS) 50 6:AE(TS) 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50
Sim46-18 GAMMA SET. 1:AE 50 2:TEXT 50 3:PHOTO 1 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50
Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key. The entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy window. Sample copying can be performed during this simulation. 19 Exposure mode setting ( table setting/AE operation mode setting/Photo image process setting)
Used to set the following three items. Select an item with the UP/DOWN key of the cross key and enter a set value with 10-key. (1) : table setting (2) : AE operation mode (3) : PHOTO image process setting When this simulation is executed, the current set code number of the above three modes are displayed.
Sim46-19 AE MODE 1:AE MODE 2:AE STOP 3:PHOTO [ 1- 2]
1 0 1 1
(1) AE MODE( table setting) Used to set the priority operation mode of the AE mode. When the image takes priority regardless of the toner consumption, set to 1. When the toner consumption must be suppressed regardless of image quality, set to 2. Code number 1 2 table setting Priority on image quality (Default for Japan) Priority on toner consumption (Default for EX Japan) Default: 2
* If this setting is changed, SIM 46-30 returns to the default. (2) AE STOP (AE operation mode) Used to set the area for automatic exposure correction in image process. Code number 0 1 AE operation mode Lead edge stop (Default) Real time process (All areas) Default: 0
(3) PHOTO (PHOTO image process setting) Used to set the image process when the PHOTO mode is selected. Selection is available in the following two modes: Code number 1 2 Dither process Image process mode Error diffusion process (Default) Default: 1
Main code 46
Sub code 20 SPF exposure correction
Contents
Remark
Used to set the exposure correction amount in the SPF mode. (Since a slightly darker image is outputted in the SPF mode compares to the OC mode, the difference from the OC mode is corrected with this simulation. When, therefore, the exposure in the OC mode is corrected, the SPF exposure is also changed accordingly.) Enter a correction value with 10-key and press [OK] key. The adjustment value is saved in the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the adjustment copy window. Since this simulation is used to make up for the exposure difference from the OC mode regardless of the exposure mode, the adjustment is fixed to TEXT mode and the exposure mode cannot be changed. After completion of copying for check, the machine returns to the setting window.
Sim46-20 SPF EXP. 1:SPF EXPOSURE 50
[ 1- 99]
50
The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. The default is 50. Adjustment value (Image change) 99 (Dark) 50 (Default) 1 (Light) 29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) Used to adjust the image contrast for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current set value of each mode is displayed in two digits. (Default: 50)
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim46-29 GAMMA SET 1:AE 50 2:TEXT 50 3:PHOTO 1 50 1/2 [ 1-99] 50 (Copy start window) Ready to copy. S 100% 8 1/2 11 (Copy execution window) Copies in progress. S 100% 8 1/2 11
Display text 1:AE 2:TEXT 3:PHOTO 1 4:PHOTO 2 5:TEXT (TS) 6:AE (TS)
Copy mode AE mode (600dpi) TEXT mode (600dpi) PHOTO mode (Error diffusion) PHOTO mode (Dither) TONER SAVE mode (TEXT)(600dpi) TONER SAVE mode (AE)(600dpi)
Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key and enter a desired value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
BACK Adjustment item selection window
OK
Copy start window
START
START End of copy execution
Copy execution window
manuals4you.com
Main code 46
Sub code 30 AE limit setting
Contents
Remark Default: 0 (AE limit value)
Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save) mode. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim46-30 AE LIMIT Window display : Mode 1: AE : AE limit value 1:AE 0 2: AE (TS) : AE (Toner save) limit value 2:AE(TS) 0 [ 0- 31] 0
Select an item to be changed with [ ] and [ ] keys and enter a desired value with 10-key. The entered value is saved to the EEPROM. The adjustment value is in the range of 0 - 31. (Default: 0) * Note: When SIM26 - 06 (Destination setting) and SIM46 - 19 (Auto exposure mode) are changed, this setting returns to the default accordingly. 31 Image sharpness adjustment Used to adjust sharpening/shading of image for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim46-31 SHARPNESS 1:AE 1 2:TEXT 1 3:PHOTO 1 1 1/2 [ 0- 2] 1 Sim46-31 SHARPNESS 4:PHOTO 2 1 5:TEXT(TS) 1 6:AE(TS) 1 2/2 [ 0- 2] 1
Display text 1:AE 2:TEXT 3:PHOTO 1 4:PHOTO 2 5:TEXT (TS) 6:AE (TS) Set value 0 1 2
Copy mode AE mode TEXT mode PHOTO mode (Error diffusion) PHOTO mode (Dither) TONER SAVE mode TONER SAVE mode Image quality Shading Standard *Default Sharpening
The adjustment range is in the range of 0 - 2. (Default: 1) Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key and enter a desired value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
(Copy start window) Ready to copy. S 100% 8 1/2 11 START (Copy execution window) Copies in progress. S START 100% 8 1/2 11 End of copy execution Copy execution window Adjustment item selection window BACK
OK
Copy start window
Main code 48
Sub code 01
Contents Main/sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scanning (front/rear) direction and the sub scanning direction. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim48-1 COPY MAG. Display text array 1:F-R 50 1: F-R 2:SCAN 50 [ 1- 99] 50 2: SCAN
Remark
: Adjustment mode : Main scan direction magnification ratio (OC/CR)SPF) : Sub scan direction magnification ratio (OC)
The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50). When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the ratio is increased by 0.1%. Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key and enter a desired value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
OK
Copy start window
manuals4you.com
Main code 48
Sub code 05
Contents SPF/RSPF mode sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment in copying Used to adjust the sub scanning magnification ratio in the SPF/RSPF mode. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim48-5 (R)SPF ZOOM Display text array : Adjustment mode 1: RSPF (SIDE1) : SPF/RSPF sub scan direction magnification 1:RSPF(SIDE1) 50 ratio adjustment on the front of document 2:RSPF(SIDE2) 50 2: RSPF (SIDE2) : RSPF sub scan direction magnification ratio setting on the back of document [ 1- 99] 50
Remark
The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50) . When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the ratio is increased by 0.1%. Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key and enter a desired value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying. To adjust the sub scanning magnification ratio on the back of the document, shift the window to the copy start window and select "Duplex Simplex" or "Duplex Duplex" mode with the duplex mode key.
OK
Copy start window
* The exposure mode is fixed to "TEXT" with density 3, and cannot be changed. * For the model without RSPF, the adjustment item of document back is not displayed.
Main code 49
Sub code 01 Flash Rom program writing mode
Contents
Remark
Used to download the programs and data sections of the main unit MCU/IMC board, the FAX board, and the operation panel. When this simulation is executed, the machine immediately shifts to the download mode and the following display is shown. O When entering the download mode
Download Mode.
Connect the main unit and the download PC with a USB cable, and start downloading with the maintenance tool. When downloading is started, the display is changed as follows: O Receiving download data
Download Data Receiving.
O Processing download data
Do not turn the power off.
O When downloading is completed
Processing finished. Turn off the power.
O When an error occurs

Error. MCU : IMC : FAX : PNL :
-----
Used to display an error code at the error position in downloading of MCU/IMC/FAX/PANEL. The error codes to be displayed are shown below.
manuals4you.com
Main code 49
Sub code 01 MCU

0xFF 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B FAX communication error PANEL communication error Download file error No process OK Data receive error (Protocol error 1) Data receive error (Command error) Data receive error (Protocol error 2) Loader transfer error Flash Rom delete error (Boot) Flash Rom delete error (Program) Flash Rom write error (Boot) Flash Rom write error (Program) Flash Rom LOCK error (Boot) Flash Rom LOCK error (Boo) Sum check error (Loader) Sum check error (Boot) Sum check error (Boot) Sum check error (EEPROM) EEPROM read error EEPROM write error EEPROM verify error Download data length error No process OK
Contents
Remark
IMC
No process OK
PANEL
IMC sum check error IMC verify error
Flash Rom delete error Flash Rom write error Boot Flash Rom write error (Program section) Flash Rom write error (Common window data) Flash Rom write error (Copy window data) Flash Rom write error (Scan window data) Flash Rom write error (Print window data) Flash Rom write error (Fax window data) Flash Rom write error (Fax window data) FROM size error Destination error Download file structure error
Sum check error (Boot not-written) Sum check error (Loader) Sum check error (After Boot writing) IMC communication error (Message test send error) IMC communication error (Message test send error) IMC communication error (Download request send error) IMC communication error (Download request parameter send error) MCU receive error (Overrun, Fleming, parity) MCU receive time-out Sum check error (Program) Sum check error (Common window data) Sum check error (Copy window data) Sum check error (Scan window data) Sum check error (Print window data) Sum check error (Fax window data) Panel-MCU communication error Download file error
FAX
0xFF 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x11 0x12 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x41 0x42 0x43 No process OK Download impossible Total data size error LOADER no file DWLD no file BOOT no file MAIN no file FONT download impossible Option FLASH connection error Option FLASH no match LOADER data size error LOADER work sum check error BOOT data size error BOOT work sum check error BOOT Flash erase error BOOT Flash write error BOOT Flash sum check error MAIN data size error MAIN work sum check error MAIN Flash erase error MAIN Flash write error MAIN Flash sum check error FONT data size error FONT work sum check error FONT Flash erase error 0x44 0x45 0x52 0x56 0x57 0x58 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x65 0x71 0x72 0x73 0x74 0x75 0x81 0x82 0x83 0x84 0x85 0x91 0x92 0x93 0x94 0x95 FONT Flash write error FONT Flash sum check error Registration data work sum check error Registration data format error Registration data items insufficient error Registration data items overlap error BOOT data size error BOOT work sum check error BOOT Flash erase error BOOT Flash write error BOOT Flash sum check error MAIN data size error MAIN work sum check error MAIN Flash erase error MAIN Flash write error MAIN Flash sum check error FONT data size error FONT work sum check error FONT Flash erase error FONT Flash write error FONT Flash sum check error DWLD data size error DWLD work sum check error DWLD Flash erase error DWLD Flash write error DWLD Flash sum check error
Main code 50
Sub code 01 Image lead edge adjustment
Contents
Remark
Used to adjust the following items related to the lead edge adjustment. 1.Print start position (Offset between output image and paper Adjusted for each tray.) 2.Image lead edge void (Margin on the output image lead edge) 3.Document scanning start position (Image scanning start position in the sub scanning direction) When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim50-1 LEAD EDGE 1:TRAY1 50 2:TRAY2 50 3:MFT 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50 Sim50-1 LEAD EDGE 4:DEN-A 50 5:RRC-A 50 6:DEN-B 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50
Display text 1:TRAY1 2:TRAY2 (*) 3:MFT 4:DEN-A 5:RRC-A 6:DEN-B
:Adjustment mode :Print start position (TRAY1) :Print start position (TRAY2 - TRAY4) :Print start position (MULTI BYPASS) :Image lead edge void amount :Document scanning start position :Image rear edge void amount
Note 1: Items marked with (*) are displayed when TRAY2 and following options are not installed. Note 2: When executing an adjustment copy from the manual paper feed tray, set the following paper. AB series A3 paper Inch series Double Letter paper Note 3: When the adjustment value of the print start position adjustment is increased by 1, the ON timing of the resist roller is delayed and the print result is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm. Note 4: When the adjustment value of the image scanning start position is increased by 1, the scanning start position is shifted to the home position by about 0.1mm, increasing the image loss amount. Note 5: When the print start position (TRAY1) is changed, the print start positions (TRAY2 - TRAY4) and the print start position (MULTI BYPASS) are also changed accordingly. The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50) Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
OK
Copy start window
manuals4you.com
Main code 50
Sub code 01
Contents (Adjustment procedure) (1) Set the print start position (1: TRAY1), the lead edge void amount (4: DEN - A), and the scanning start position (5: RRC - A) to "1" and make a copy of 100%. (2) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale. Set [5:RRC - A] = 10xR(mm). (Example. Set 40.) When the value of [5: RRC - A] is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by1mm. (Default: 50) (3) Measure the distance (H mm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set [1:TRAY1] = 10xH(mm). (Example: Set 50.) When the value of [1:TRAY1] is increased by 10, the image lead edge shifts to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50) (4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50(2.5mm). (Default: 50) When the value of [4:DEN - A] is increased by 10, the void amount is increased by about 1mm. (For 25 or less, the void amount is zero.) [Example]
Copy output result Paper lead edge
Remark
Distance between the paper lead edge to the image lead edge H=5.0mm
Scale image loss amount R=4.0mm
06
Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) Used to perform the image lead edge adjustment in the SPF/RSPF copy. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim50-6 SPF EDGE 1:SIDE1 50 50 2:SIDE2 3:END EDGE 50 [ 1- 99] 50 Display text array : Adjustment mode 1: SIDE1 : Document (front) scan start position adjustment 2: SIDE2 : Document (back) scan start position adjustment 3: END EDGE : Document rear edge image loss adjustment
The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50). When the adjustment value of the document scanning start position is increased by 1, the scanning timing is advanced, resulting in a smaller image loss. Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key and enter a desired value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
OK
Copy start window
Main code 50
Sub code 10 Paper off-center adjustment
Contents
Remark Default: 1
Used to adjust the output area (main scanning direction) of scanned image data on paper. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim50-10 PRT. CENTER 1:TRAY1 50 2:TRAY2 50 3:TRAY3 50 1/2 [ 1- 99] 50 Sim50-10 PRT. CENTER 4:TRAY4 50 5:BYPASS 50 6:DUPLEX 50 2/2 [ 1- 99] 50
Display text 1:TRAY1 2:TRAY2 (*) 3:TRAY3 (*) 4:TRAY4 (*) 5:BYPASS 6:DUPLEX (*)
:Adjustment mode :Print center offset (TRAY1) :Print center offset (TRAY2) :Print center offset (TRAY3) :Print center offset (TRAY4) :Print center offset (BYPASS) :Print center offset (DUPLEX 2nd print surface)
Note 1: Items marked with (*) are displayed when TRAY2 and following options are not installed. Note 2: When executing an adjustment copy from the manual paper feed (BYPASS) tray, set the following paper according to the destination specification. AB series A3 paper Inch series Double Letter paper The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50) When the adjustment value is increased, the output image is shifted to the right. When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the image is shifted to the right by about 0.1mm. Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
OK
Copy start window
manuals4you.com
Main code 50
Sub code 12 Document off-center adjustment
Contents
Remark
Used to adjust the scanning start position in the main scanning direction of the document. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim50-12 ORG. CENTER 1:OC 50 2:SPF(SIDE1) 50 3:SPF(SIDE2) 50 [ 1- 99] 50 Display text array : Adjustment mode 1: OC : OC document off-center adjustment 2: SPF (SIDE1) : SPF document (front) off-center adjustment 3: SPF (SIDE2) : SPF document (back) off-center adjustment
(Note) 2:SPF(SIDE1) is available only for the model with the SPF/RSPF. (Note) 3:SPF(SIDE2) is available only for the model with RSPF. The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50) When the adjustment value is increased, the document scanning position is shifted to the right and the image is shifted to the left as a result. When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the scanning area is shifted by 0.1mm. Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
OK
Copy start window
Main code 50
Sub code 18
Contents Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy Used to adjust the reverse point (scanning end position) on the reversed surface in duplex copy. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed
(Adjustment item selection window) Display text array : Adjustment mode Sim50-18 DUP REV. 1: OC : OC memory reverse output position 1:OC 50 2: SPF : SPF memory reverse output position 2:SPF 50 [ 1- 99] 50
Remark
The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50) Front surface print in S-D mode and even page print in D-S mode are reverse memory copy operations from the document rear edge. When, therefore, the print start position adjustment of the output image is required, adjust as follows: The image in the reverse memory copy is printed from the scanning rear edge when the document scanning direction is in the arrow direction as shown below. If, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart with the rear edge on the reference position, and adjust the simulation set value with this simulation so that the print image lead edge matches. Since printing is started at the print start position from the last memory image data to the head data, the end data position saved in the memory is changed by changing the scanning end position with the simulation, adjusting the image lead edge position.
Document transport direction Scan lead edge Paper transport direction
Print lead edge Lead edge void (1 Print start position
Scan end position (Default: Void (1) is not scanned.) Scan direction Scan rear edge
Rear edge void Print rear edge
Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
OK
Copy start window
manuals4you.com
Main code 50
Sub code 19 Rear edge void adjustment in duplex copy
Contents
Remark
Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim50-19 DUP R VOID 1:PRV(SIDE1) 50 2:PRV(SIDE2) 50 3:RRC-D 50 [ 1- 99] 50 Display text array : Adjustment mode 1: PRV (SIDE1) : Paper rear edge void amount (1st print surface) 2: PRV (SIDE2) : Paper rear edge void amount (2nd print surface) 3: RRC-D : Print start position (2nd print surface)
The adjustment value is in the range of 1 - 99. (Default: 50) When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the rear edge void amount is increased by about 0.1mm. Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying
OK
Copy start window
o you.c ls4 anua m
Main code 51
Sub code 02 Resist amount adjustment
Contents
Remark
Used to adjust the contact pressure (warp amount) of paper against the resist roller of the main unit resist roller and the SPF/RSPF. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Sim51-2 RESIST ADJ. 1:TRAY1 50 2:TRAY2 50 3:TRAY3 50 1/3 [ 1- 99] 50 Sim51-2 RESIST ADJ. 4:TRAY4 50 5:BYPASS 50 6:RSPF(SIDE1) 50 2/3 [ 1- 99] 50 2 Sim51-2 RESIST ADJ. 7:RSPF(SIDE2) 50 8:RSPF A5 50 9:DUPLEX 50 3/3 [ 1- 99] 50
Sim51-2 RESIST ADJ. 10:PRE FEED 50
4/4
1- 99]
50
Display text 1:TRAY1 2:TRAY2 3:TRAY3 4:TRAY4 5:BYPASS 6:RSPF(SIDE1) 7:RSPF(SIDE2) 8:RSPF A5 9:DUPLEX 10: PRE FEED
:Adjustment mode :Resist amount in paper feed from TRAY1 :Resist amount in paper feed from TRAY2 (*1) :Resist amount in paper feed from TRAY3 (*1) :Resist amount in paper feed from TRAY4 (*1) :Resist amount in paper feed from manual tray :Resist amount on SPF/RSPF document surface (*1) :resist amount on RSPF document back (*1) :Document resist amount in A5 document back transport (*1) :Resist amount in DUPLEX print (Second print surface) (*1) :Pre-feed time of the manual feed tray paper feed. (*2)
(*1) Valid only when an option is installed. (If an option is not installed, it is not displayed on the adjustment window.) (*2) When heavy paper slips in manual feed copy, or when a paper jam occurs in thin paper copy, adjust this set value to remove the problem. Heavy paper slips. Increase the set value. Thin paper jams. Decrease the set value. The adjustment range is 1 - 99. The default of pre-feed time for manual paper feed tray paper feed is 32. The default for the others 50. Select an adjustment item (mode) with the cross key, and enter the set value with 10-key. When [OK] key is pressed, the entered value is saved to the EEPROM and the machine shifts to the copy execution window. After completion of copying, the machine returns to the adjustment value input window. When [START] key is pressed instead of [OK] key, the machine shifts to the copy execution window and performs copying.
OK
Copy start window
manuals4you.com
Main code 53
Sub code 08 SPF scanning position automatic adjustment
Contents
Remark
Used to adjust the SPF stop position of the mirror unit in the SPF copy. The scanning position is basically determined by the automatic adjustment. It can be also adjusted manually.
(Automatic adjustment window) Sim53-8 SPF AUTO (Manual adjustment window) Sim53-8 SPF AUTO
An optional value can be entered manually. When OK or START key is pressed, the entered value is saved in the EEPROM. When START key is pressed, the window shifts to the sub code input standby window. When, however, OK key is pressed, the window does not shift.
PRESS OK KEY EXEC adjustment OK
50
50
OK/START Key
START Key
Sim53-8 SPF AUTO
Sub code input standby window
EXEC
50
adjustment NG
OK/START Key
Sim53-8 SPF AUTO When the automatic adjustment result is NG, "ERR" is displayed on the value display. PRESS OK KEY EXEC ERR
10
SPF scanning position setting Used to change setting depending on whether the SPF unit and the SPF document glass holder section are anti-dirt glass or not. When this simulation is executed, the selection window of the adjustment items and the current set value are displayed.
(Adjustment item selection window) Setting value: Adjustment mode Sim53-10 SPF RD POS 0: SPF scan position setup for model which is 1:SPF RD POS 1 not provided with dirt prevention 1: Scan position setting for dirt prevention SPF * Default = 1 (Dirt prevention part) [ 0- 1] 0
Default: 1
Though this setting is changed, the other adjustment values are not changed. When replacing or installing the SPF unit, use this simulation to set the position and perform the scanning position automatic adjustment. 61 03 HSYNC output check When this simulation is executed, the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec together with the LEND signal. "EXEC" (indicating execution) and "HSYNC" (HSYNC sensor detecting status) are displayed. Every time when the HSYNC signal is detected, "HSYNC" display is highlighted for 100ms.
Initial window Sim61-3 LSU CHECK OK/START (Execution window) Sim61-3 LSU CHECK HSYNC
PRESS OK KEY
EXEC
EXEC
Main code 63
Sub code 01 Shading check
Contents
Remark
Used to display the detection level when the lamp of the white plate for shading correction is lighted. When the simulation code is entered, the initial window is displayed to urge execution. Press [OK] key or [START] key to start the simulation. The contents of the operations are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. The mirror base unit is shifted to the white plate for shading correction. The copy lamp is lighted. "0" is displayed until the copy lamp light quantity is stabilized. When the light quantity is stabilized, the level of 1 pixel on the CCD center which is not corrected is displayed in hexadecimal. * The white level is displayed for about 10sec. The data update cycle is about 1sec. 5. After passing 10sec, the machine returns to the sub code input window.
Sim63-1 SHADING OK/START Sim63-1 SHADING
PRESS OK KEY
EXEC
061
07
SPF automatic correction Used to adjust the SPF white correction start pixel position. When the carriage or the platen glass is replace, this simulation must be executed. When this simulation is executed, the initial window as shown below is displayed. When [OK] key or [START] key is pressed with the OC cover open, the automatic adjustment is executed and the position (which pixel from the CCD edge) of the exposure correction sheet (white Mylar) in the SPF position is displayed. After completion of adjustment, the result is saved to the EEPROM. When the result is in the range of 93 - 299, it is judged as a success. If not, it is judged as an error. In case of an error, the result is not saved to the EEPROM.
(Initial window) Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST ERROR [---] PRESS OK KEY EXEC
Failure
PRESS OK KEY EXEC
OK/START (Execution window) Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST Success Sim63-7 SPF ADJ. WHITE ADJUST COMPLETE [160] PRESS OK KEY EXEC
EXEC
* Since this simulation detects the border line between the white Mylar (white) edge and the sky-shot (black), if the simulation is executed with the SPF unit (OC cover) open, it is judged as an error. * Since the adjustment value is the position of the border line, in order to execute white correction in an actual SPF copy, the point is "Adjustment value - 34th pixel."
manuals4you.com
Main code 64
Sub code 01 Self print
Contents
Remark
Used to perform printing of one page disregarding the optical system status. Also when the print command is issued from the host, printing is performed. When this simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since, however, the optical system is invalid, initializing is not performed.) There are following four self-printable patterns.Use 10-key to select a pattern. The selected pattern is displayed on 7-segment LED. 7SEG LED 0 1 2 3 Print pattern 1BY2 mode (*1) Grid pattern (*2) White paper Black background
(4 - 99: Input invalid) (*1) After outputting 1 line black data, white data of 2 line is outputted. (*2) The grid pattern of about 1cm square is outputted. (*3) Data are always made for A3 size. If printing is made on paper smaller than A3, the remaining data are not outputted. (Images are not formed on the drum.)
(Initial window) Ready to copy. S 100% 8 1/2 11 Copies in progress. S 100% 8 1/2 After completion of printing one sheet 11
Press OK Key or START Key
1
7SEG LED
65
10
Key reception time setting display/non-display setting Used to set Enable/Disable of the key reception time setting in the key operator program. When this setting is set to Enable (1), the key reception time is displayed in the key operator program, allowing setting.
Sim65-10 KEY TIME 1:KEY ACK TIME 1 Display: Setting 0: Disable 1: Enable (Default)
Default: 1 (Enable)
0- 1]
[CA] key: Exit the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window. 11 Info lamp setting Used to set the Info lamp brightness (PWM duty) and the kind of flashing.
Sim65-11 INFO LAMP 1:PWM DUTY 1 2:BLINK TYPE 1 [ 1- 5] 1 Lamp brightness 1: 100% (Default) 2: 80% 3: 60% 4: 40% 5: 20% Kind of flashing 1: Flashing (Default) 2: Flashing 10 times, and lighting thereafter. 3: Lighting
Default: 1 (Flashing)
During this simulation, Info lamp is lighted to allow checking of the brightness. [CA] key: Exit the simulation mode. [Interruption] key: Shifts to the sub code input window.
Main code 67
Sub code 50 USB reception speed adjustment
Contents
Remark Default: 3 (Normal2)
Used to set an limitation on the print data reception speed when the USB transfer speed is at full speed.
Sim67-50 USB SPEED 1:FULL SPEED 2 Display Fast 1 2 3 Slow 4 : Setting : FAST : NORMAL 1 : NORMAL 2 (Default) : SAFE
1- 4]
* When images are disturbed in printing through USB, change the setting and try again. CA key: Exits from the simulation mode. Interruption key: Shifts to the sub code entry window.
manuals4you.com
[8] TROUBLE CODE LIST

1. Trouble code list
Main code E1 Sub code 00 10 11 13 16 81 82 84 E7 01 02 10 11 12 16 F2 F5 F6 04 02 00 10 80 81 82 84 88 99 F9 H2 H3 H4 H5 L1 L3 L4 L6 L8 U1 U2 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 11 10 01 03 04 11 40 U9 00 80 81 82 84 88 99 IMC PWB trouble IMC ASIC error IMC PWB flash ROM error IMC PWB DIMM memory read/write check error Interface error in communication with IMC PWB (Parity) Interface error in communication with IMC PWB (Overrun) Interface error in communication with IMC PWB (Framing) Duplex model memory error LSU trouble Shading trouble (Black correction) Shading trouble (White correction) Shading trouble Abnormal laser output Improper cartridge (destination error, life cycle error) Copy lamp lighting abnormality FAX board communication trouble FAX board trouble FAX board communication trouble (Protocol) FAX board communication trouble (Parity) FAX board communication trouble (Overrun) FAX board communication trouble (Framing) FAX board communication trouble (Time out) Machine - FAX language error AR-NB3 communication trouble Thermistor open Heat roller high temperature detection Heat roller low temperature detection 5-time continuous detections of POUT not-reached jam Scanner feed trouble Scanner return trouble Main motor lock detection Shifter motor trouble Polygon motor lock detection No full wave signal FAX board battery error EEPROM read/write error (serial communication error) Counter check sum error (EEPROM) CRUM chip communication error Panel board communication trouble Panel board communication trouble (Protocol) Panel board communication trouble (Parity) Panel board communication trouble (Overrun) Panel board communication trouble (Framing) Panel board communication trouble (Time out) Panel language error Content IMC PWB communication trouble
2. Details of trouble codes

Main Sub code code E1 00 Content Detail Cause Details of trouble IMC PWB communication trouble. An abnormality occurs in communication between the MCU PWB and the IMC PWB. IMC PWB-MCU PWB harness abnormality. MCU PWB connector disconnection. IMC PWB ROM defect/data abnormality. Check connection of the connector and the harness between the IMC PWB and the MCU PWB. Check the ROM of the IMC PWB. IMC PWB trouble. An abnormality occurs in the IMC PWB. USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC PWB. Replace the IMC PWB with a new one.
Check and remedy 10 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 11 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 13 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 16 Content Detail
IMC ASIC error. An abnormality occurs in the IMC PWB. Abnormality in ASIC on the IMC PWB. Replace the IMC PWB with a new one.
IMC PWB flash ROM error. An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash ROM. IMC PWB abnormality. Replace the IMC PWB with a new one. If downloading of the program is abnormally terminated, it may cause an error. Download the program again to avoid this. IMC PWB DIMM memory read/write check error. An installation error occurs in the IMC expansion compression memory module. An error occurs during access to the IMC expansion compression memory. Improper installation of the IMC expansion memory module. IMC expansion memory module abnormality. IMC expansion memory contact abnormality. IMC PWB abnormality. Check installation of the expansion memory module. Replace the expansion memory module. Replace the IMC PWB with a new one. Interface error in communication with IMC PWB (Parity). A parity error occurs in communication between the MCU PWB and the IMC PWB. IMC PWB-MCU PWB harness defect. Improper connection of the MCU PWB connector. IMC PWB ROM defect/data abnormality. Check connection of the connector/harness between the IMC PWB and the MCU PWB. Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
Cause
Check and remedy 81 Content Detail Cause
Check and remedy
AR-M207 M165 M162 TROUBLE CODE LIST 8-1
Main Sub code code E1 82 Content Detail Cause
Details of trouble Interface error in communication with IMC PWB (Overrun). An overrun error occurs in communication between the MCU PWB and the IMC PWB. IMC PWB-MCU PWB harness defect. Improper connection of the MCU PWB connector. IMC PWB ROM defect/data abnormality. Check connection of the connector/harness between the IMC PWB and the MCU PWB. Check the ROM of the IMC PWB. Interface error in communication with IMC PWB (Framing). A framing error occurs in communication between the MCU PWB and the IMC PWB. IMC PWB-MCU PWB harness defect. Improper connection of the MCU PWB connector. IMC PWB ROM defect/data abnormality. Check connection of the connector/harness between the IMC PWB and the MCU PWB. Check the ROM of the IMC PWB. Duplex model memory error. The memory capacity for the duplex model machine is improper. Insufficient memory capacity. The memory capacity of the MCU PWB is improper. Use SIM 26-39 to check that the memory capacity is 32MB. If it is not 32MB, replace the MCU PWB with a suitable one. LSU trouble. The BD signal from the LSU cannot be detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or always ON) LSU connector or LSU harness defect or disconnection. Polygon motor rotation abnormality. Laser beams are not generated. MCU PWB abnormality. Check connection of the LSU connector. Execute SIM 61-03 to check the LSU operations. Check that the polygon motor rotates normally. Check that the laser emitting diode generates laser beams. Replace the LSU unit. Replace the MCU PWB. Shading trouble (Black correction). The CCD black scan level is abnormal when the shading. Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable CCD unit abnormality. MCU PWB abnormality. Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable. Check the CCD unit.
Main Sub code code E7 11 Content Detail Cause
Details of trouble Shading trouble (White correction). The CCD white scan level is abnormal when the shading. Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference white plate. Copy lamp lighting abnormality. CCD unit abnormality. MCU PWB abnormality(When occurred in the SPF scan position). Improper installation of the mirror unit. Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. Check the light quantity and lighting status of the copy lamp (SIM 05-03). Check the MCU PWB. Shading trouble. White correction is not completed in the specified number of operations. CCD unit flat cable connection failure. Dirt on mirrors, lenses, and the reference white plate. Copy lamp lighting abnormality. CCD unit abnormality. MCU PWB abnormality . Clean mirrors, lenses, and the reference white plate. Check the copy lamp light quantity (SIM 05-03) and lighting. Check the CCD unit. Check the MCU PWB. Abnormal laser output. When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is detected. Laser abnormality. MCU PWB abnormality. Check the laser emitting diode operation. Replace the MCU PWB. Improper cartridge (destination error, life cycle error) The destination of the machine differs from that of the CRUM. The life cycle information is other than "Not used (FFh)". CRUM chip defect. Improper developing unit . Replace the CRUM chip. Replace the developing unit.
Check and remedy 84 Content Detail Cause
Check and remedy
12
Content Detail Cause
Check and remedy E7 01 Content Detail
Cause Check and remedy 02 Content Detail
Check and remedy
16
Content Detail Cause Check and remedy
Cause
F2
04
Content Detail
Check and remedy
Cause Check and remedy
10
Identificat The trade mark code of the CRUM differs. ion error The company code of the CRUM differs. Model error The boot program model code does not coincide with the CRUM model code.
Check and remedy
Type error When the CRUM type is other than genuine/ conversion/production rotation. Destinatio The machine destination differs from the n error CRUM destination. Data When an error value is included in the initial abnormali check information. When the max. toner supply ty time is 00. When the print hard stop is 00. Misc error When the Misc information is other than "Not used (FFh)".
manuals4you.com
Main Sub code code F5 02 Content Detail Cause
Details of trouble Copy lamp lighting abnormality. The copy lamp does not turn on. Copy lamp abnormality. Copy lamp harness abnormality. CCD PWB harness abnormality. Use SIM 5-3 to check the copy lamp operations. When the copy lamp lights up. Check the harness and the connector between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB. When the copy lamp does not light up. Check the harness and the connector between the copy lamp unit and the MCU PWB. Replace the copy lamp unit. Replace the MCU PWB. FAX board communication trouble. FAX board communication error. No command can be sent from the MCU to the FAX. Check connection of the FAX board. Replace the FAX board. FAX board trouble. FAX board abnormality detection. FAX controller and FAX board memory abnormality. Replace the FAX board.
Main Sub code code F6 88 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 99 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy F9 00 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy H2 00 Content Detail Cause
Details of trouble FAX board communication trouble (Time out). FAX board communication error. There is no respond command from the FAX for 30sec or more. Check connection of the FAX board. Replace the FAX board. Reset the machine (Power OFF/ON). Machine - FAX language error. Discrepancy of the destination of the machine and the FAX board. The destination of the machine differs from that of the FAX board. Change the destination setting with SIM26-6. Replace the FAX board with one which. conforms to the destination of the machine. AR-NB3 board communication trouble. AR-NB3 print data reception error. Print data cannot be received from the AR-NB3 for 3 min or more. Reset the machine (Power OFF/ON).
Check and remedy
F6
00
10
Thermistor open. The thermistor is open. The fusing unit is not installed. Thermistor abnormality. Control PWB abnormality. Fusing section connector disconnection. The fusing unit is not installed. Check the harness and the connector between the thermistor and the PWB. Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. Heat roller high temperature detection. The fusing temperature exceeds 240C. Thermistor abnormality. Control PWB abnormality. Fusing section connector disconnection. Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking operation. When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp keeps ON. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.
80
FAX board communication trouble (Protocol). A break error occurs in communication between the MCU and the FAX board. MCU PWB connector connection failure/ Garbled data. Check connection of the FAX board. Replace the FAX board. Reset the machine (Power OFF/ON). FAX board communication trouble (Parity). A parity error occurs in communication. between the MCU and the FAX board. MCU PWB connector connection failure/ Garbled data. Check connection of the FAX board. Replace the FAX board. Reset the machine (Power OFF/ON). FAX board communication trouble (Overrun). An overrun error occurs in communication between the MCU and the FAX board. MCU PWB connector connection failure/ Garbled data Check connection of the FAX board. Replace the FAX board. Reset the machine. (Power OFF/ON). FAX board communication trouble (Framing). A framing error occurs in communication between the MCU and the FAX board. MCU PWB connector connection failure/ Garbled data. Check connection of the FAX board. Replace the FAX board. Reset the machine (Power OFF/ON). H3 00
Check and remedy Content Detail Cause
81
Check and remedy
82
84
Main Sub code code H4 00 Content Detail
Details of trouble Heat roller low temperature detection. When the fusing temperature is lower than 150C after 55sec from the start of warming up. When the warming up complete temperature is not reached in 30sec from reaching 150C. When the fusing temperature is lower than 100C after 20sec from ready start. When the fusing temperature is lower than 145C when printing. Thermistor abnormality. Heater lamp abnormality. Thermostat abnormality. Control PWB abnormality. Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking operation. When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp does not light up. Check for disconnection of the heater lamp and the thermostat. Check the interlock switch. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. 5-time continuous detections of POUT notreached jam. Paper not-reached jams are detected 5 times or more continuously by the paper exit sensor (POUT). The jam counter is backed up and used for jobs after turning on the power. A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper remains in the machine.) Paper exit sensor trouble or harness connection trouble Defective installation of the fusing unit. Check the fusing section jam (for winding, etc.). Check the POUT sensor harness. Check installation of the fusing unit. Use SIM14 to clear the self diag display. Scanner feed trouble. The scanner does not complete feeding in the specified time. Mirror unit abnormality. The scanner wire is disconnected. The origin detection sensor abnormality. Mirror motor harness abnormality. Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating operations. When the mirror does not feed. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor.
Main Sub code code L3 00 Content Detail
Details of trouble Scanner return trouble. The scanner does not complete returning in the specified time. The mirror is not in the home position when OC copying is started with the mirror standby in the home position. Mirror unit abnormality. Scanner wire disconnection. Origin detection sensor abnormality. Mirror motor harness abnormality. Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating operations. When the mirror does not return. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor. Main motor lock detection. The main motor does not rotate. The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec or more after rotation of the main motor. The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec during rotation of the main motor. Main motor unit abnormality. Improper connection or disconnection the main motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality. Use SIM 25-01 to check the main motor operations. Check connection of the main motor harness/ connector. Replace the main motor. Replace the MCU PWB. Shifter motor trouble. The shifter home position detection signal is not detected when initializing the shifter. Shifter motor abnormality, improper connection or disconnection of the harness, shifter home position sensor abnormality. Use SIM 03-11 to check the shifter motor operations. Check connection of the harness/connector of the shifter motor. Replace the shifter motor. Replace the MCU PWB. Polygon motor lock detection. The polygon motor does not rotate. The motor lock signal is detected for 6sec after rotation of the polygon motor. The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec during rotation of the polygon motor. Polygon motor unit abnormality. Improper connection or disconnection of the polygon motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality. Use SIM 61-1 to check the polygon motor operations. Check connection of the polygon motor harness/connector. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the MCU PWB.
Cause
Cause
Check and remedy
Check and remedy
L4
01
Content Detail
H5
01
Content Detail
Cause
Cause
Check and remedy
Check and remedy L1 00 Content Detail Cause
11
Check and remedy
Check and remedy
L6
10
Content Detail
Cause
Check and remedy
manuals4you.com
Main Sub code code L8 01 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy U1 03 Content Detail Cause
Details of trouble No full wave signal. The zero cross signal is not detected. Power unit abnormality. MCU PWB abnormality. Check connection of the harness and connectors. Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the power unit. FAX board battery error. FAX board backup battery error. The voltage of the backup battery of SRAM which is installed to the FAX board falls below a certain level. Replace the battery.
Main Sub code code U9 82 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 84 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 88 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 99 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy
Details of trouble Panel board communication trouble (Overrun). An overrun error occurs in communication between the MCU and the panel board. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble/ Garbled data. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble. Replace the panel or the MCU PWB. Machine reset (Power OFF/ON). Panel board communication trouble (Framing). A framing error occurs in communication between the MCU and the Panel PWB. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble/ Garbled data. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble. Replace the panel or the MCU PWB. Machine reset (Power OFF/ON). Panel board communication trouble (Time out). A time-out error occurs in communication between the MCU and the Panel PWB. A command is completely sent from the MCU to the panel. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble. Replace the panel or the MCU PWB. Machine reset (Power OFF/ON). Panel language error. Language discrepancy error. Discrepancy between the machine language and the panel language. Replace the panel or the MCU PWB. Reset the machine. (Power OFF/ON).
Check and remedy U2 04 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 11 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 40 Content Detail Cause
EEPROM read/write error (serial communication error). EEPROM access process error. EEPROM abnormality. Check that the EEPROM is properly set. Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble. Replace the MCU PWB. Counter check sum error (EEPROM). Check sum error of the counter area in the EEPROM. EEPROM abnormality. Check that the EEPROM is properly set. Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble. Replace the MCU PWB. CRUM chip communication error. An error occurs during communication between the MCU and the CRUM chip. CRUM chip abnormality. Developing unit disconnection. MCU PWB abnormality. Replace the chip. Check installation of the developing unit. Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble. Replace the MCU PWB. Panel board communication trouble. Communication trouble with the panel board. No command can be sent from the MCU to the panel. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble. Replace the panel or the MCU PWB. Machine reset (Power OFF/ON). Panel board communication trouble (Protocol). An error occurs in communication between MCU -Panel PWB. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble/ Garbled data. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble. Replace the panel or the MCU PWB. Machine reset (Power OFF/ON). Panel board communication trouble (Parity). A parity error occurs in communication between the MCU and the Panel PWB. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble/ Garbled data. MCU PWB - Panel PWB harness trouble. Replace the panel or the MCU PWB. Machine reset (Power OFF/ON).
Check and remedy U9 00 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 80 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy 81 Content Detail Cause Check and remedy
manuals4you.com
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
X:Check(Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) O:Clean Unit name Drum peripheral OPC drum Cleaning blade Side seal F/R MC unit (MC charging electrode) (MC grid) (MC case) Transfer wire Transfer paper guide MC guide sheet (Cleaning blade attached) Drum fixing plate B Process frame unit Discharge holder Developing section Developer DV seal DV under seal DV side seal Side Mylar Optical section Lamp unit No.2/3 mirror unit CCD peripheral Glass Other Reflector Mirror Mirror Pulley Lens Table glass White Plate Drive wire Rail Document cover Document size sensor LSU Paper feed section Multi paper feed section Dust-proof glass Take-up roller(manual / SPF) Paper feed roller Spring clutch Paper transport section PS roller Transport (paper exit) rollers Spring clutch Fusing section Upper heat roller Pressure roller Pressure roller bearing Upper separation pawl Lower separation pawl Drive section Paper exit section *1:Recommendable replacement time:50K(Letter,5%print) Gears Belts Ozone filter*1 X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O X X X X X X Part name When calling X X O O X X O O O O X O O O X X O O O O O O O O O O O X X X X X X X X O O O X O O O X X O O O O O O O O O O O X X X O O O O X O X X X O O O X O O O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O X X O X O O ( ( ( O O ) ) ) ( ( ( O O ) ) ) ( ( ( O O ) ) ) X X X :Replace 50K :Adjust 100K :Lubricate 150K
AR-M207 M165 M162 MAINTENANCE 9-1
2. Maintenance display system

Toner Life, Remaining quantity check *1 16K a. Press and hold the density adjustment LIGHT key for more than 5 sec, and the machine will enter the user program mode. b. Press and hold the "%" key for more than 5 sec, and the remaining quantity will be displayed on the copy quantity display in one of the following levels: (Remaining quantity display levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, LO) c. Press the density adjustment LIGHT key to cancel. NEAR EMPTY About 10% EMPTY Flash
Remaining quantity
Message and icon ON on the LCD Machine Developer Life 50K
Operation allowed Stop
Message and icon ON at 50K of the on the LCD developer count Machine Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup. (If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 50K.) * Default: Not Stop * Clear: SIM 42-1
Maintenance Message and icon Selection is available among 50K, 25K, 10K, 7.5K, 5K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1. on the LCD * Default: 50K * Clear: SIM 20-1 Machine Not stop *1:Installation of a new toner cartridge allows to display the remaining quantity.
C. DV seal attachment procedure
3. Note for replacement of consumable parts

A. Toner cartridge
When a waste toner cartridge is removed from the machine, it must be put in a polyethylene bag to avoid scattering of toner.
1) When attaching the DV side Mylar, check the position shown in the figure below and attach it properly.
B. DV cartridge
Do not shake or put up the developer cartridge. Otherwise developer may scatter.
2) When attaching the DV side sheet, check the position shown in the figure below and attach it properly. (First of all, attach the DV side Mylar.)
* Be sure to attach the DV side sheet so that the notch is on the outside.
AR-M207 M165 M162 MAINTENANCE 9-2
manuals4you.com
[10]DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

WARNING Before performing the disassembly procedure, be sure to remove the power cord to prevent against an electric shock. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Optical section Fusing section Paper exit section MCU Optical frame unit LSU Tray paper feed section/Paper transport section Manual multi paper feed section Power section Developing section Process section Others Item High voltage section/Duplex transport section
B. Charger wire
Installation: The spring tip must be between two reference ribs. The charger wire must be free from twist or bending. Be sure to put the charger wire in the V groove.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1. High voltage section/Duplex transport section

No. A B C Transfer charger unit Charger wire Duplex transport section Content
(5) (1) (3) (4)
(2)
A. Transfer charger unit

(3)
C. Duplex transport section

(4) (3) (3)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1) (3) (2)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1)
AR-M207 M165 M162 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10-1
2. Optical section
Note: When disassembling or assembling the optical unit, be careful not to touch the mirror and the reflector. No. A B C D E F G Table glass Copy lamp unit Inverter PWB for copy lamp Copy lamp Lens unit Wire Document detection Content
C. Inverter PWB for copy lamp

(1)
(2) (1)
A. Table glass
(1) (2) (1) (4) (3)
(1) (1)
(3)
(3)
(2)
B. Copy lamp unit

Disassembly: Assembly: Adjustment: Be sure to put No. 2/3 mirror unit to the positioning plate (A). Put the notched surface of wire holder (3) downward, tighten temporarily, and install. Main scanning direction distortion balance adjustment
D. Copy lamp
(2)
(4) (4)
(2) (3) (2) (2)

(3) (3)
(1)
(A)
(A)
(1) (2) (3)
manuals4you.com
E. Lens unit
Note: Do not remove screws which are not indicated in the figure. If the height of the base plate is changed, it cannot be adjusted in the market. Note: The CCD/lens unit is factory-adjusted before shipping. Since these adjustments cannot be performed in the market. Never touch the screws other than screw 2) of the CCD/lens unit.
(1) (2) (1) (1)
F. Wire
(1)
(4)
(4) (3)
(3) (2) (3) (4)

(2)
Lens unit attachment <1>Attach the lens unit so that the lens unit number on the lens adjustment plate is aligned with the scribe line on the base plate.
Lens unit number

( ) direction
Reference line (0)

(+) direction One division: 1.4mm
G. Document detection For U.S.A.

(3)
(2)
(1) (2) (3)
CCD adjustment value +4 scales +3 scales +2 scales +1 scale Reference -1 scale -2 scales -3 scales -4 scales 5.0~ 3.6~4.9 2.2~3.5 0.8~2.1 -0.6~0.7 -2.0~ -0.7 -3.4~ -2.1 -4.8~ -3.5 ~ -4.9
(1)
(4)
(2)
For EU. Australia

(2) (2) (3) (1) (3) (1) (4)
<2>Make a sample copy at the above position, and measure the magnification ratio. <3>Change the installing position in the horizontal direction to adjust the magnification ratio. When the copy image is longer than the original, shift to the positive (+) direction. When the copy image is shorter than the original, shift to the negative (-) direction. * 1 scale of the scribed line corresponds to 0.34% of magnification ratio. * If this adjustment is not satisfactory, make a fine adjustment with SIM 48-2.
(2)
3. Fusing section
No. A B C D E F G H I Fusing unit Thermostat Thermistor Heater lamp Upper heat roller Separation pawl Lower heat roller Separation pawl Cleaning pad Contents
C. Thermistor
Installation: When installing the thermistor, be sure to face the installing projection (A) toward the installing surface. Check that the thermistor is in contact with the upper heat roller.
(1)
(A) (2)
A. Fusing unit removal
(1) (1)
D. Heater lamp
Assembly: Insert the spring (A) into the hole (B) in the fusing frame.
(3) (2)
(A) (B)
(2)
B. Thermostat
(1) (2)
(1)
(2)
(2) (3)
Assembly: Put the paper guide earth spring (A) under the paper guide (B) before fusing.
(A)
(B)
(1) (2) (1)
manuals4you.com
(2)
Floil(GU2) Grease(JFE552)
(1)
(1) (4) (2) (A)
(3) (1)
(B) (C)
F. Separation pawl
Assembly: Put the fusing harness (A) on the heater lamp (B) as shown in the figure and fix them together.<R>Place the fusing harness inside the rib (C).
(1)
(2)
E. Upper heat roller

(3)
Disassembly:
There are three pawls on the fusing cover. Remove the screws and slide the fusing cover to the right to remove. The heater lamp is fixed on the fusing cover with a screw. Slide the fusing cover to the front and remove the screw, then remove the heater lamp.
(2) (3)
(2)
(1) (3)
(1)
(2)
G. Lower heat roller

Assembly: When installing the paper guide (3) before fusing, fix the paper guide fixing plate with screws temporarily so that the paper guide fixing plate (2) is in contact with the frame bottom under fusing (A). Fit the mark (B) on the fusing front paper guide (3) with the top of the rib (C), and tighten the screw securely.
I. Cleaning pad
How to clean paper dust on the fuser cleaning felt. Remove Fusing rear paper guide from Fusing unit during every periodic maintenance (50K) and clean the collected paper dust using a ruler or other straight-edge device. Replace the cleaning felt at 150k or earlier if damaged.
Fusing rear paper guide

Grease(JFE552)
(4)
(3) (1) (1) (2) (C) (B) (B) (C)
Paper dust
Cleaning felt AS
4. Paper exit section

No. A B C D E F G Ozone filter Cooling fan Paper exit unit Transport roller Paper exit roller Paper exit interface P.W.B. Paper exit sensor / duplex sensor Content
(2)
(A)
A. Ozone filter H. Separation pawl

(1) (2)
(1)
(1) (1)
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
manuals4you.com
B. Cooling fan
(3) (2) (1) (3) (3)
(2) (3)
(1) (4) (1) (2) (1) (2)
(3)
Duplex model
(1) (1)
(1)
C. Paper exit unit
(3) (3) (2)
(4)
Simplex model
(1) (3) (3) (1) (2) (3) (2)
(1)
(3)
(2) (2) (1)
(5)
(3)
(4) (6) (4) (5) (1) (1) (2) (1)
D. Transport roller
(1)
(2)
(1) (2)
(1)
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(4)
F. Paper exit interface PWB

(5) (4)
(when the job separator is installed)

(1)
(1)
(2) (1) (3) (3) (3)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
E. Paper exit roller

Assembly: Insert the spring pin so that the waveform (A) of the spring pin faces in the longitudinal direction of the paper exit drive gear long hole (B).<R>Be sure to insert two ribs (C) into the groove (D).
(1)
(1)
(A)
(B)
(1) (3) (2)
(D) (1)
G. Paper exit sensor/duplex sensor

(A) Exit sensor
(1) (C) (2) (C)
(B) Duplex sensor
(A)
(B)
manuals4you.com
5. MCU
No. A MCU disassembly Content
7. LSU
No. A LSU unit Content
A. MCU disassembly
Note: When replacing the MCU PWB, be sure to replace the EEPROM of the MCU PWB to be replaced.
(3)
A. LSU unit
(4)
(3) (3) (4) (2) (2) (3) (1) (1) (3) (3) (1) (1) (1) (2) (1) (1)
(1) (3) (3) (1) (2)
(1) (2) (1)
(3) (1)
Note: When replacing the MCU PWB, be sure to restore the original jumper conditions.
6. Optical frame unit

No. A Optical frame unit Content
A. Optical frame unit

Installation: Install the optical unit in the sequence shown above. Note: Do not disassemble the LSU. Note: When replacing the LSU, be careful not to touch the dust-shield glass. Adjustment: Image lead edge position adjustment Image left edge position adjustment Paper off-center adjustment
(2)
(1) (1) (1) (1)
Size of the screwdriver for removing the LSU
(1) More than 50mm Less than 120mm (1)
(1)
8. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport section

No. A B C D E Middle frame unit Drive unit Solenoid (paper feed solenoid,, resist roller solenoid) Resist roller clutch / Resist roller Paper feed clutch/Paper feed roller (Semi-circular roller) Content
B. Drive unit
Assembly: Move down the clutch pawl as shown below, and avoid the clutch and install.
(1) (2)
A. Middle frame unit

(2)
(1)
(1) (2)
Assembly: Do not miss the door lock pawl.
Molykote PG 75
(1) (1) (1) (2)
Grease G-484
C. Solenoid (paper feed solenoid, resist roller solenoid)

(3)
(2)
(2) (1)
manuals4you.com
D. Resist roller clutch/Resist roller
9. Manual multi paper feed section

No. A Content Manual transport roller/Manual paper feed roller Manual multi paper feed Manual feed solenoid Manual transport clutch Pressure plate unit Manual paper feed clutch
(1) (2)
B C D E F
A. Manual transport roller/Manual paper feed roller

Note: Push the lever at the right edge of the multi frame cover to the right upper side and remove it.
(3)
(3)
(3)
(4)
E. Paper feed clutch/Paper feed roller (Semi-circular roller)
A A
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(2) (5) (3) (1)
(4)
TOK
L
CK
(7)
(6)
Installation: Be careful of the installing direction of the manual transport roller (6) AR-M207 M165 M162 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10-11
B. Manual multi paper feed
D. Manual transport clutch
(2)
(1) (3)
(3) (5) (1) (4)
(4) A
(2)
(5) (2) A A
(3) (4)
C. Manual feed solenoid
E. Pressure plate unit
(2) (2)
(3)
(1) (B) (2) (A)

(1)
(2)
(2) (3)
(1)
manuals4you.com
F. Manual paper feed clutch

Note: Push the lever at the right edge of the multi frame cover to the right upper side and remove it.
(1) (2) (1)
10.Power section
No. A B C D E
A A
Content Power unit Power fan High voltage P .W.B. Power P.W.B. Power switch
A. Power unit
A
(1)
(1) (2)
(1) (3)
(1)
(2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (2) (2)

(2) (2)
(1) (2) (1)
B. Power fan
(2)
(3) (1) (4)
(3) (2)
(1)
(1)
C. High voltage P.W.B.

(1) (2)
11.Developing section
No. A B C Developing box Developing doctor MG roller Contents
(1)
A. Developing box
D. Power P.W.B.
(1) (2) (2) (1) (1)
B. Developing doctor

(2) (3) (2)

E. Power switch
Adjustment:
Developing doctor gap adjustment
(1)
(1)
(2)
manuals4you.com
C. MG roller
12.Process section
No. A B C Drum unit Main charger unit Cleaning blade Contents
A. Drum unit
(2)
(1)
LO C K
# " !
(1) (2)
!
B. Main charger unit

(1)
(2) (1)
$
Adjustment:
MG roller main pole position adjustment
Note: Attach it to fit with the attachment reference when replacing the DV blade.
C. Cleaning blade
(1) (1) (1) (2)
13.Others
No. A B C D E F G H I J K L M Operation P.W.B. Tray interface P.W.B. 2nd tray paper entry sensor / Paper empty sensor 2nd tray paper feed solenoid / Transport solenoid 2nd tray transport clutch 2nd tray transport roller 2nd tray paper feed clutch 2nd tray paper feed roller Main motor I/F P.W.B. Paper entry sensor Paper empty sensor Paper feed roller
(9) (8) (8) (8) (4) (4) (5) (6) (4) (7)
Contents
(1) (4)
(4)
(2)
(2)
(2) (2) (3) (1)
A. Operation P.W.B.
B. Tray interface P.W.B.
(1) (2)
(1)
(1)
(5) (6) (5) (5) (5)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3) (3) (1) (2)
(3) (1)
(1) (1) (2) (1)
manuals4you.com
C. 2nd tray paper entry sensor / Paper empty sensor

(4)
F. 2nd tray transport roller

(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(2) (3)
(3)
B (1)
(A) 2nd tray paper entry sensor (B) Paper empty sensor (A)
G. 2nd tray paper feed clutch
(B)
A (2) (1)
D. 2nd tray paper feed solenoid / Transport solenoid

(2) (2)
(3)
H. 2nd tray paper feed roller

(1) (1)
E. 2nd tray transport clutch
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
I. Main motor
(1)
(2)
(2) (3)
(1)
L. Paper empty sensor
(3) (2)
(1)
(3) (2)
J. I/F P.W.B.
(2)
(1)
(2) (3)
M. Paper feed roller
(2) (1)
(2)
K. Paper entry sensor
(1)
(2)
* When removing the paper feed roller, operate the paper feed clutch with SIM 6-1, and keep the paper feed roller down as shown in the figure above for operation.
(1)
manuals4you.com
[11]KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM

1. Custom setting
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM KEY OPERATOR NUMBER CHANGE ACCOUNT CONTROL KEY OPERATOR NUMBER CHANGE 00000 Set value(Default) Remark
AUDITING MODE TOTAL/ACCOUNT RESET ACCOUNT ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL ACCOUNT LIMIT ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNT
Copy, Printer and Scanner Reset 1 Account, Reset All Account Enter, Delete, Change Account Number Single Account Limit, All Account Limit No (No warning) Cancel (Not inhibited) ON*/OFF UPPER TRAY, CENTER TRAY Enable (The function works.) 30, 40, 50*, 60, 70% Full speed mode*/High speed mode 0, 10, 30*, 60sec 0, 10, 20, 60*, 90, 120sec Unchecked Short (3sec), Normal (6sec)*, Long (9sec) Low*, High, Off Off (Check box unchecked) Minimum* 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0sec OFF (The auto repeat functions.) OFF (Paper size setting can be made.) On (Check box is checked) 5*, 30, 60, 120, 240min 1*, 5, 30, 60, 120, 240min excluding U.K ON (Automatic acquisition of IP address) ON (Protocol enable) ON (Protocol enable) ON (Protocol enable) ON (Protocol enable) Original glass, Document feeder Level 1, 2, 3*, 4, 5 AB system: 0, 5, 10*, 15, 20mm Inch system: 0, 1/4, 1/2*, 3/4, 1inch AB system: 0, 5, 10*, 15, 20mm Inch system: 0, 1/4, 1/2*, 3/4, 1inch AB system Y: 54mm, X: 86mm Inch system Y: 2 1/8inch, X: 3 3/8inch Tray 1*, 2, 3, 4, BYPASS TRAY Auto*, TEXT, PHOTO Check box unchecked Check box checked No sort, Sort* 300*, 600dpi Pattern 1*, 2 99, 999*copies Check box unchecked Check box unchecked when the AR-NB3 is installed
DEVICE CONTROL
WAITING COPY LAMP SETTING OFFSET FUNCTION MEMORY FOR PRINTER USB2.0 MODE RETURN FROM COPY MODE TIMING
OPERATION SETTINGS
AUTO CLEAR DISABLE DISPLAY TIMEOUT LANGUAGE SETTING MESSAGE TIME KEY TOUCH SOUND KEY TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT KEY PRESS TIME DISABLE AUTO KEY REPEAT DISABLE PAPER SIZE SET
ENERGY SAVE
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER PREHEAT MODE TONER SAVE MODE
NETWORK SETTING
DHCP enable IP address enable TCP/IP enable NetWare enable EtherTalk enable NetBEUI enable
COPY SETTING
EXPOSURE ADJUST MARGIN DEFAULT ERASE ADJUST CARD SHOT DEFAULT DEFAULT TRAY SET DEFAULT EXPOSURE STREAM FEEDING ROTATION COPY SORT AUTO SELECT RESOLUTION IN AUTO/TEXT MODE PHOTO MODE DEFAULT LIMIT OF COPIES DISABLE AUTO PAPER SELECTION DISABLE 2-SIDED COPY
AR-M207 M165 M162 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM 11-1
manuals4you.com
[12]FLASH ROM VERSION UP PROCEDURE

1. Preparation
Write the download data (the file with the extension dwl) to the main body of AR-M207/M162/M165. Necessary files for download Maintenance.exe (Maintenance software) ProcModelH.mdl ProcModelH.fmt ProcModelH.ini Driver Drivers\2kXP\Mainte.inf (For XP/2000) Drivers\Win9xME\Mainte.inf (For ME/98) Drivers\Win9xME\UsbScan.sys (For ME/98) Download File Download File:***.dwl <Note> When creating a folder for a maintenance tool in the PC, be sure that no lengthy folder name is included in the path. (Example) Incorrect c:\Maintenance Download Tool Correct c:\Maintenance\Downtool 3) Check that the following display is shown. Select "Install from a list or the specific location" and press the [Next] button.
4) Select "Include this location in the search". If the retrieval area does not include the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select [Browse] button. If the folder path is properly shown, press the [Next] button to go to procedure (7).
2. Driver Installation procedure

<Note> When the driver for the AR-M205/M160 is already installed, there is no need to install the driver.
A. USB joint maintenance program installation

The driver is installed by plug and play.
B. Installation procedure on Windows XP

1) Machine side: Executable by performing the Service Simulation No. 49-01 (Flash Rom program-writing mode). (A word Download mode. appears on the operation panel to denote the download mode status. ) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Be sure to connect the USB cable to the main unit side. Connection to the optional dual function board cannot execute this function.)
5) Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press the [OK] button. (When the driver is included in the C:\Maintenance Tool\Divers\2kxpfolder:)
6) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is shown, and press the [Next] button.
AR-M207 M165 M162 FLASH ROM VERSION UP PROCEDURE 12-1
7) Check that the following display is shown. Press the [Continue Anyway] button.
4) Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device" and press the [Next] button.
8) When installation is completed, the following display is shown. Press the [Finish] button. 5) Select "Specify a location" and press the [Next] button.
The installation procedure (on Windows XP) is completed with the above operation.
C. Installation procedure on Windows 2000

1) Machine side: Executable by performing the Service Simulation No. 49-01 (Flash Rom program-writing mode). (A word Download mode. appears on the operation panel to denote the download mode status. ) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Be sure to connect the USB cable to the main unit side. Connection to the optional dual function board cannot execute this function.) 3) Check that the new hardware search wizard is shown. Press the [Next] button.
6) If the reference position is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select [Browse] button. If the reference position is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press [OK] button to go to procedure (9).
7) Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press [Open] button.
manuals4you.com
8) Check to confirm that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press [OK] button. (Supposing that the maintenance tool driver is included in the folder of C:\Maintenance Tool\Drivers\2kXp.
3. Download procedure
1) Main body side: Executable by performing the Service Simulation No. 49-01 (Flash Rom program-writing mode). (A word Download mode. appears on the operation panel to denote the download mode status. ) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Be sure to connect the USB cable to the main unit side. Connection to the optional dual function board cannot execute this function.)
9) Press the [Next] button, and installation is started.
3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select [AR-M207/M162/M165 Series] on the model selection menu.
10) When installation is completed, the following display is shown. Press the [Finish] button.
<Sample display> 4) PC side: Check to confirm that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integrated maintenance program.
11) When the indication is displayed to reboot the PC, press [YES] button and boot the PC. The installation procedure of the joint maintenance program on Windows 2000 is completed with the above operation.
manuals4you
.com
5) PC side: If "The copier is off." is displayed on the left lower side after booting the integrated maintenance program, select [File] and then [Reconnect] on the menu bar.
8) PC side: Specify the download file (*.dwl).
6) PC side: Check to confirm that the tree is displayed on [Special (MCU/IMC2/ Panel/ Facsimile)] of the integrated maintenance program. If the tree is not displayed, check that the USB is properly connected and select [Reconnect] again in the previous procedure of (5).
9) PC side: When the DWL data file is specified, the DWL data file is transferred from the PC to the machine. Downloading is proceeded automatically.
10) PC side: When the message below is displayed, download is completed. Completion message: Download is completed. Do not turn the copier power off until Processing finished. Turn off the power. is displayed on the copier.
7) PC side: Double click [Special (MCU/IMC2/Panel/Facsimile)] on the main tree items to extend the sub tree items, and select [DWL Data Area Download].
NOTE (Important): Be sure that the power is not turned off and the USB cable is not removed until the word "OFF" appears. 11) Main body side: Wait until the word Processing finished.Turn off the power. appears on the operation panel. The appearance of Processing finished.Turn off the power. indicates the completion of the download (writing into ROM). Turn the power off and the USB cable can be removed at this point.
manuals4you.com
12) Terminate the maintenance program, and turn on the power of the main body. NOTE: For making a second connection with another machine, select the [File] and [Reconnect] in the menu bar on the maintenance program at the time of the USB being re-connected. Repeat the previous procedures from the above 5).
4.Version confirming procedure

1) Machine side: Execute the service simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program writing mode). (A word Download mode. appears on the operation panel to denote the download mode status. ) 2) Connect the main unit and the PC with a USB cable. (Be sure to connect the USB cable to the main unit side. Connection to the optional dual function board cannot execute this function.) 3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select [AR-M207/M162/M165 Series] on the model selection menu.
* Forbidden actions while downloading (Important) Failure in the download concerned may not allow you to conduct the subsequent download procedures. Added care should be taken to avoid having the situation below arise while downloading. Switching off the main body of AR-M207/M162/M165. Disconnecting the download cable (USB cable). * If the above inhibit item occurs during downloading: Turn OFF and ON the power. 1) If Download mode. (which means downloading) is displayed on the operation panel of the machine, perform downloading again. 2) If Download mode. (which means downloading) is not displayed on the operation panel of the machine, turn OFF the power, and press and hold the 4 key and the CA key and turn ON the power. If, then, Download mode. (which means downloading) is displayed on the operation panel LED of the machine, perform downloading again. If Download mode. is still not displayed, the MCU/Panel/IMC2/Fax must be replaced. 4) PC side: Check to confirm that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integrated maintenance program.
5) PC side: If "The copier is off." is displayed on the left lower side after booting the integrated maintenance program, select [File] and then [Reconnect] on the menu bar.
6) PC side: Check to confirm that the tree is displayed on [Special (MCU/IMC2/ Panel/ Facsimile)] of the integrated maintenance program. If the tree is not displayed, check that the USB is properly connected and select [Reconnect] again in the previous procedure of (5).
7) PC side: Double click [Special (MCU/IMC2/Panel/Facsimile)] on the main tree items to extend the sub tree items, and select [Confirm version].
8) Check to confirm that the display below is indicated.
Version confirming is completed with the following procedures: In version confirming, "**.**.**" means that connection is not made with the MCU PWB or that download is not performed. (The above figure shows the case where the FAX PWB is not installed.) When download is completed, the version number is displayed such as the MCU boot version and the MCU program version. The CPM and the SD-RAM size are displayed when the MCU/Panel PWB is installed and the boot section operates normally.
manuals4you.com
Scanner Unit
CCFL Document size unit Lamp Invertor SDRAM Flash ROM 8bits(MSB/LSB) JTAG /SPFCOVER,PAPER,Sensor SPFOPEN,/SPFOUT P-Bus ISP1581 OA982 ADRS Latch OC open/close detection L1,2 W0,1,2,3 Selector HOME POSITION SENSOR SPFCLH,SPFGSOL Driver Document size unit SPFPSOL,SPFRSOL SPMT0/1/2/3 SPFMOTOR Driver DIMM SOCKET
RSPF
IMC2 PWB
CCD PWB
1. Block diagram
12V
12V
Reg A5V
3.3V
CCD (TCD2704)
B/W R G B
AFE(AD9826 or AD9822) A M C G AD P D C X S 16bit
5V
1, 2, TG, TG2, TG3 RB, CLB, 1L 24V 12V,5V,3.3V 3.3V CLON Image BUS (M-Bus) Video Pegasus ASIC HSYNC UART UART FAX_Reset Software Reset 3.3V Reset IC (19.6608MHz) A[19 D[15 SRAM (2Mb(1Mb*2)) Flash ROM (8Mbit) SSCG UART A[19 D[15 1] 0] OPU_Reset LCD PWB 0] 1] CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz) FSOL PSOL Y1 SELIN1,2,3 I/O ASIC UART with FIFO Expansion I/O port Document size sensor control 2nd, 3rd, 4th cassettes Feed SOL, Pick up SOL Cassette detection, Paper detection, Paper pass detection, Door detection ES_Reset (296pin) Image BUS (PI-Bus) Image BUS (PO-Bus) 8 8 16 PWM MHPS
ADCCLK,SYNCH, BSAMP,VSAMP SDI,SCLK,LOAD,OBE MODE LVTTL
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
MCU-PWB
I/F PWB I E E E 1 2 8 4
LVC1284
IEEE 1284 I/F
FAX-PWB UN
U S B 1
PDIUSBP11AD
USB I/F
Printer CLK(20.3094MHz)
Download
Scanner CLK(48MHz)
SDRAM Simp 16Mbyte Dup 32Mbyte
DUPLEX
Driver
USB2.0 High-speed
CCD Driver
KEY PWB 5V 7seg LED TB62705CF LED CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz)
SHIFTER
DMT0/1/2/3
Driver
Shifter MOTOR 8Kbyte EEPROM CRUM CPU CLK(19.6608MHz) PMD PMCLK(2078.74(Hz))
Sensor
SFTHP
SJMT0/1/2/3 JOBS_FMT0/1/2/3
HC151
KEY MATRIX
Job Separator
MM_AI0/Al1/PH_ MM_BI0/Bl1/PH_
/MMD
TM+,TM-
/MMRDY
USB 2
Pegasus2 main unit (USB 2.0 / 1.1)
Block Diagrams(Copier+SCANNEER+GDI+E-Sort+Duprex+USB2.0+FAX Model)
AR-M207 M165 M162 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13-1

Driver Driver SRAM (1Mb) Flash ROM (4Mbit,8Mbit) Kanji font ROM (Japan only) SSCG POWER SUPPLY Mirror Motor LSU Polygon Motor FAN (Measures against ozone) /VIDEO S/H APCSTT /SYNC /POFF,HL,PR FW 3.3V,5VEN,5V,24V HVU TC,GRID,MC,BIAS CPU CLK(19.6608MHz) AR-NB3(Network box) PCL Network print & scan AC-Adaptor Network Box PWB UN
Driver
INFO LAMP Buzzer 24V
FAX KEY PWB FAX KEY
Sensor
Other Loads
MainMotor
Toner Motor
LCD (73dot x 119dot) Backlight (Green LED)
MPFS,RRS, SGS,SRRC,SPUS,SPPS, VFMCNT,VFM,MPFS,CPFS2, CPFS1
PC Erther
Other Inputs
COIN VENDOR/AUDITOR
/CV_COPY
CPU INTERRUPT SPPD CPU I/O RTH DRST
/CV_COUNT,/CV_START,/CV_CA, /CV_DPX,/CV_SIZE0,1,2,3
2. Circuit descriptions
A. Main PWB (MCU)
(1) General
The MCU PWB is composed of: CPU peripheral sections which perform mechanical sequence control and function job management Image process ASIC which performs image process, CCD control, LSU control, and print control Motor control circuit Mechanical load, sensor I/O circuit It controls the processes for copying, the transport loads, fusing, the optical system, the operation panel, and the option PWB.
No. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DESCRIPTION ChipSelect for SRAM ChipSelect for ROM Ground Ground Power Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Ground Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Ground Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Address Bus Ground Address Bus EXT-PCB Wake Up Interrupt SPF Paper Detect Interrupt ASIC Interrupt Mirror Home Position Interrupt ASIC Interrupt Ground Ground Zero Cross Interrupt ASIC Interrupt Power Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Ground Data Bus 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 79 78 74 75 76 77 73 70 71 72 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
SIGNAL PE5/D5 PE6/D6 PE7/D7 PD0/D8 PD1/D9 PD2/D10 PD3/D11 Vss PD4/D12 PD5/D13 PD6/D14 PD7/D15 Vcc P30/TxD0 P31/TxD1 P32/RxD0 P33/RxD1 P34/SCK0 P35/SCK1 Vss P60/DREQ0/ CS4 Vss Vss P61/TEND0/ CS5 P62/DREQ1 P63/TEND1 P27/PO7/ TIOCB5/TMO1 P26/PO6/ TIOCA5/TMO0 P25/PO5/ TIOCB4/TMCI1 P24/PO4/ TIOCA4/TMRI1 P23/PO3/ TIOCD3/TMRI0 P22/PO2/ TIOCC3/TMRI0 P21/PO1/ TIOCB3 P20/PO0/ TIOCA3 WDTOVF RES NMI STBY Vcc XTAL EXTAL Vss PF7/fai Vcc RF6/AS RD HWR PF3/LWR PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO PF1/BACK
In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out GND In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out 3.3V Out Out In/Out Out In GND Out GND GND In Out Out Out Out Out
DESCRIPTION Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Ground Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Data Bus Power CRUM I2C Bus Control For Debug 12C Bus DATA Option Cassette Detect Signal 12C Bus Clock USB Detect Signal Ground Not use Ground Ground Flash ROM Ready/Busy Outconnect telephone control USB I/F Control Not use
(2) CPU signal table (H8S/2321)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SIGNAL PG3/CS1 PG4/CS0 Vss NC Vcc PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P67/IRQ3/CS7 P66/IRQ2/CS6 Vss Vss P65/IRQ1 P64/IRQ0 Vcc PE0/D0 PE1/D1 PE2/D2 PE3/D3 Vss PE4/D4 In/Out Out Out GND GND 3.3V Pull-Up Out Out Out GND Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out GND Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out GND Pull-Up In In In In In GND GND In In 3.3V In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out GND In/Out
Power OFF Signal Print Start Signal
Out Out Out Out Pull-Up In Pull-Up Pull-Up 3.3V
Duplex Motor Drive Duplex Motor Drive Duplex Motor Drive Duplex Motor Drive Watchdog Timer Over flow Reset Input NMI Interrupt Stand-by Power
19.6608MHz System Clock 19.6608MHz System Clock GND Pull-Up 3.3V Out Out Out Out Out Out Ground System Clock Power Software Reset Signal Read Enable High Write Enable Low Write Enable 151 Selector Signal 151 Selector Signal
manuals4you.com
No. 96 97 98 99 100 101 102
SIGNAL PF0/BREQ P50/TxD2/IRQ4 P51/RxD2/IRQ5 Vss Vss P52/SCK2/IRQ6 P53/ADTRG/ IRQ7/WAIT/ BREQO Avcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 Avss Vss P17/PO15/ TIOCB2/TCLKD
In/Out Out Out In GND GND In Out
DESCRIPTION 151 Selector Signal IMC2 Status Transmission IMC2 Status Reception Ground Ground IMC2 Status Transmission Enable IMC2 Status Reception Ready
No. 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128
SIGNAL P16/PO14/ TIOCA2 P15/PO13/ TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/ TIOCA1 P13/PO11/ TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/ TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/ TIOCB0/DACK1 P10/PO8/ TIOCA0/DACK0 MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CAS PG1/CS3 PG2/CS2
In/Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out GND GND Pull-Up Out Out Out
DESCRIPTION Scan start Signal Trans start Signal Polygon Motor Clock SPF Motor Drive SPF Motor Drive/Mirror Motor Step count SPF Motor Drive SPF Motor Dribe CPU Mode Control Input(Mode4) CPU Mode Control Input(Mode4) CPU Mode Control Input(Mode4) Not use ChipSelect for I/O ASI ChipSelect for ASIC
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115
3.3V 3.3V In In In In In In In In GND GND Out
A/D Power A/D Reference Thermistor Analog Input SPF Wide Sensor 151 Selector Input 151 Selector Input 151 Selector Input 151 Selector Input Not use Analog Input(TC) Ground Ground Scan stop Signal
(3) Image process ASIC (HG73C141HFV)

a. General The ASIC is composed of the three major blocks: the image process section, the print control section, and the I/F section. Image process section: With image data from the CCD PWB in the operation mode determined by the register setup, shading, AE process, input correction, area separation, filter process, resolution conversion, zoom process, output correction, binary conversion (error diffusion, dither method, simple binary conversion) are performed. Print control section: When copying, the image-processed data are outputted to the LSU according to the LSU writing timing. When scanning, the image data are made into 8bit width and outputted to the I/F section (USB). I/F section: Controls the DRAM which is the image data buffer, and processes data send/receive between the USB I/F and the IEEE1284 I/F. The ASIC is controlled by writing the operation mode and the necessary setup values of the operation mode into the ASIC control register before starting each operation. (For ASIC Pin configuration, refer to the table at the end of this document.)
Scan start ASIC Image process section CCD drive CCD PWB Print control section
LSU Resolution conversion, Zooming, lmage process circuit Print data process circuit
Shading
AE PRINT control DRAM control I/F section ASIC control resistor DRAM 8MB or 16MB To CPU bus
HSYNC VSYNC
(4) Reset circuit

This circuit detects ON/OFF of power to control start/stop of each circuit. The 3.3V voltage of the main PWB is detected by the reset IC to generate the reset signal. When the power voltage reaches the specified level, the circuit operations are started. Before the power voltage falls below the specified level, the circuit operations are stopped to prevent against malfunctions.
CPU (ASIC Reset) Reset_OUT PF6
2 1 3
ASIC
IC5A /RES
VCC3 VCC3
R18 11kF 1 2 3 4 R21 10kF
IC4 NC IN NC GND NC VCC OUT Cd 8 7 6 5
R19 10kJ
M51957BFP
C23 0.1u
C24 22000p
(5) Heater lamp control circuit

a. Outline The heater lamp control circuit detects the heat roller surface temperature and converts in into a voltage level. The converted voltage is inputted to the CPU analog input pin. The CPU converts the inputted analog voltage into a digital signal level and compares it with the set value of the simulation to control on/off the heater lamp according to the level, maintaining the heat roller surface temperature at a constant level.
VCC3 24V VCC3
R86 1kF
R87 1MF
R88 7.5kF T376 3
R89 1kJ IC23A 1 KIA393F-EL 24V VCC3 C127 1 3 2 D3 DAN202U or KDS121 0.1u/50V 1 T380 FTH
D2 MA700 R97 10kF
+ 4
2 R98 2.7kF
5VEN
INT5V
D1 R288 10kJ Q5 DTC114EKA OUT DSCLK# 1SS355
24V 8 IC27A 1 1 T403 R109 300J
T404
RTH_IN
3 2 C128 22000p
+ -
R110 100J RTH C129
IN
KIA358F-EL 24V 4 C130 0.1u/50V
GND
0.1u
T371 1 1 IC22 PMCLK DSCLK HL FTH AUD_PNC AUD_COPY AUD_CA T373 T375 T379 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G KID65503F
THOPEN
VCC3 R113 1.2kF
24V
5V R114 10kJ
T416 5 1 6 R115 10kF
IC23B 7 KIA393F-EL C136 22000p
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
T372
PMCLK_A 2 T374 3 1 R93 240J R94 240J
1 R243 T385
*0J
(/AUD_PNC) (/AUD_COPY) (/AUD_CA)
+ -
HLOUT
VCC3 D5 KDS226 1 3 2 8 IC27B 7 1 T421 R117 (TCCNT) 300J KIA358F-EL 4 N.M. 5 6 C137 24V
TCCNT
+ -
The lower the heat roller surface temperature is, the greater the thermistor resistance is, and vise versa. Therefore, the lower the heat roller surface temperature is, the higher the thermistor terminal voltage is, and vise versa. The thermistor terminal voltage is inputted to the CPU analog port. The CPU controls ON/OFF of the heater lamp by this input voltage level.
manuals4you.com
[High temperature protect circuit in case of CPU hung up] For IC23 3pin (reference voltage), +3.3V is divided by the resistor. The thermistor terminal voltage is inputted to IC23 2pin. When, the voltage at 2pin becomes lower than the voltage at 3pin (when the heat roller temperature is about 220 - 230C), IC23 1pin becomes HIGH, and the HL signal is lowered to the GND potential through IC22, stopping generation of the heater lamp ON signal. (IC23 1pin is normal LOW.) [When the heat roller surface temperature is lower than the set level] 1) Since the thermistor terminal voltage is higher than the set level, the HL signal from the CPU becomes HIGH. 2) The HL signal is turned to be the HLOUT signal through IC22 protect circuit, and inputted to the photo triac coupler on the power PWB. 3) When the internal triac turns on, a pulse is applied to the gate of the external triac. Consequently a current flow from the power source through the heater lamp to the triac, lighting the heater lamp. [When the heat roller surface temperature is higher than the set level] 1) Since the thermistor terminal voltage becomes lower than the set value, the HL signal from the CPU becomes LOW. 2) The HL turns LOW, the photo triac coupler on the power PWB turns OFF, the external triac turns OFF, and the heater lamp turns OFF. [In case of the thermistor open] The voltage at IC23 6pin over the voltage at 5pin to drive the output THOPEN at 7pin to LOW. This is passed to the CPU and the trouble code "H2" is displayed.
(7) Toner supply motor drive circuit

The IC34 is the motor control IC, which generates the pseudo AC waveform with the pulse signals (TM, TM-) outputted from ASIC, driving the toner supply motor.
24V CP3
5VEN IC34 2 (TM) (TM_) 9 1 5 R132 47KJ R133 47KJ TA7291AS VDD IN1 IN2 VSS VCC1 VCC2 OUT1 OUT2 N.C 6 8 7 3 4
0603FA1.5A C155 + C154 10u/35V
0.1u
TMA_O TMB_O
(8) Main motor drive circuit

The main motor is driven by the MMD signal from ASIC. While the main motor is rotating, the MMD signal is driven to HIGH and passed through IC26 to the control circuit in the main motor to rotate the main motor. When the main motor speed reaches the specified rpm, the MMLD signal is turned LOW and passed through IC115 to the CPU.
IC26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I1 O1 I2 O2 I3 O3 I4 O4 I5 O5 I6 O6 I7 O7 COM NC TD62503F 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Main Motor
/MMD
MMD
Control Circuit ( Main Motor) MMLD
ASIC
(6) Driver circuit (Solenoid)

a. Outline Since the load signal from the CPU or the ASIC cannot drive the load directly, it is passed through the driver IC to drive the load. b. Operation The driver circuit forms a Darlington circuit with transistors. Therefore a large drive current is obtained from a small current (ASIC output current). When the driver input voltage (base resistance input) is HIGH (+3.3V), the transistor turns ON to flow a current in the arrow direction, operating the load. When the driver is ON, the driver output terminal voltage is 0V.
CPU
+24V
ASIC/CPU OUT PUT LOAD LOAD
(9) Mirror motor control circuit, Duplex motor control circuit

Stepping motors are employed for the mirror motor and the duplex motor. The driver for IC32 (for mirror motor) is the bipolar drive L6219DS. For control, the ASIC outputs the drive signal to the IC. They drive each motor in 1-2 phase excitement or 2-phase excitement. Each motor switches the motor current value in each magnification ratio. Mirror motor drive circuit
CP1 0603FA1.5A 24VM *0603FA1.5A C143 0.1u C144 0.1u + C142 47u/35V 24V CP2 24Vdup
OUT_AOUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_B24VM R120 5V 0.68J/1W R122 1.5kJ T443 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 IC32 OUT 1A OUT 2A SENSE 2 COMP 2 OUT 2B GND GND I02 I12 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 2 VS SENSE 1 COMP 1 OUT 1B I01 GND GND I11 PHASE 1 VREF 1 RC 1 VSS T437 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 T442 1 R121 1.5kJ 0.68J/1W R119
PGND
PGND 5V
C148 820p MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_PH_B T444 T446 1
MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_PH_A
C147 820p
PGND
T445
R123 1kF C149 820p
R124 30kJ
L6219DS013TR
1 R125 30kJ
C150 820p
R126 13kF
R127 3kF
R128 910F PGND
PGND 5V
PGND PGND
MMref0 MMref1 MMref2 C152 0.1u C153 0.1u + C151 10u/16V
PGND
PGND
(10)I/F circuit
a. General The I/F circuit is composed of the USB driver and the IEEE1284 driver, and performs hard interface with the ASIC (MCU PWB). b. USB circuit With the USB driver, the differential signals (analog) of USB are converted into digital signal, which are sent to the ASIC. In the reverse procedure, interface between the ASIC (engine) and the host is performed. c. IEEE1284 circuit The IEEE1284 driver is used to perform interface between the ASIC (engine) and the host.
IEEE1284 driver ASIC Centronics connector IC403
D+ USB driver IC401 DUSB connector
ASIC
OE, RCV, VP, VM Suspend, VMO VPO
manuals4you.com
(11) Carriage unit

a. General The carriage unit is provided with the CCD PWB, the inverter PWB, and the lamps. It scans documents and transfers AD-converted image data to the ASIC. b. CCD PWB The CCD on the CCD PWB employs the color image sensor uPD8861 of 5400 pixels x 3 lines, and scans documents in the main scanning direction in the resolution of 600dpi/US letter size. Image data scanned by the CCD are inputted to the AFE (AD9826), and subject to CDS, amplification, and AD-conversion. Then digital data are outputted to the MCU PWB and to the ASIC, which performs image process of the digital data. c. Lamp inverter PWB The transformer is controlled by the lamp control signal from the MCU PWB. The transformer output controls lighting of the cool cathode ray tube.
B. DC power circuit
The DC power circuit directly rectifies the AC power and performs switching-conversion with the DC/DC converter circuit, and rectifies and smoothes again to generate a DC voltage. The constant voltage control circuit is of +5VEN. +24V are of the non-control system by winding from the +5VEN winding. As shown in fig (1), +24V, and +5V are provided with the ON/OFF function by external signals. +3.3V is outputted from 24V to the step down converter. Refer to the block diagram.
manuals4you.com
manuals4you.com
6 5 4 3 2 1
Optical base plate

COPY LAMP CCD PWB DOCUMENT SENSOR (AB)or(INCH) Mirror MOTOR
OPERETION PANEL LSU

DOCUMENT SENSOR (AB)or(INCH) OC COVER SENSOR Mirror HP SENSOR
Actual wiring diagram 1/7

D
KEY-LED PWB
9610S-16B
POLYGON MOTOR APC-PWB BD-PWB
LCD-BL PWB FFC
FAX-KEY PWB (Option)
3. Actual wiring diagram
PAPER OUT SENSOR DUP SENSOR FFC
SHIFTER MOTOR
C FF
SPF ground wire Document tray harness Sensor harness
SPF UN I/F
CN403
(AB ONLY)
USB1
(INCH ONLY)
SHIFTER HP SENSOR
CN10 CN47 C N48 C N12 CN9 CN26 CN38 CN33 CN34 CN8 CN5 CN4
FFC
IEEE1284
E-SORT
FFC FFC CHECKER
COOLING FUN x2 FFC
9604S-22F x 2 (WHITE)
USB2
MC
GRID
MCFB
JOB SEPARATOR MOTOR (Option)

CN35
AUDITOR Option
CN41 CN11 CN4 CN37 CN13
LOWER SW
M CU-PWB
HVU
TC
COIN VENDER Option

CN36 CN24 CN27 CN25 CN14 CN22 CN23 CN18 CN17 CN30 CN29 CN2 CN3 CN28 CN21 CN20 CN32
B7B-PH-K-S (RED)
DUP MOTOR DUP MODEL ONLY
Bias
BC
FUSER
Japan only
THERMISTER FFC
Power PWB
CN101 B02-XL-HDB (WHITE) CN04
Dehumidifier heater SW
Toner Sensor
CASETTE SWITCH SENSOR CASETTE EMPTY SENSOR

PICK UP SOL MAIN MOTOR TONER MOTOR PS SOL
AC SW
B04P-VL (WHITE)
HEATER LAMP
AC Cord
CN001
HAND PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID
Option
NET WORK BOX PAPER IN SENSOR
Cassette dehumidifier heater Japan only
B2P3-VH (WHITE)
CN102
3P terminal 230V ONLY CRUM
FAX
CN41
1st TRAY OR 2nd CASETTE OR MULTI CASETTE
COOLING FUN
DEV UN
Option
Front Cover SW HAND PAPER EMPTY SENSOR Side Cover SW
LIU
SPEAKER
MJ1 MJ2
MCU PW B
<LSU HARNESS>
APC
CN30(B2P-VH(LF)) TM O A_ 1 TM O B_ 2 BK BK
B10B- PH- K- S 4 +5V / SYNC 5 / VIDEO 6 / SAM P 7 APCSTT 8 GND 9 SELECT 10 +5V 3 / SYNC 2 GND 1 BL RD W H PL PK GY LB RD W H PL LB GY 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OR LB PL BR PK GY LB PL BR PK GY RD OR LB PL BR PK GY LB PL BR PK GY RD CN2(B12B-PHDSS-B(LF)) 1 INT5V 2 / SYNC 3 / VIDEO 4 SHOLD 5 APCSTT D- GND 7 LPSEL 6 A / PM LK_ C 8 9 / PM RDY 10 / PM D 11 D- GND 12 24V
BL RD W H PL PK GY LB PK W H LB
BU12P- TR- P- H 1 SW 5V 2 / SYNC 3 / VIDEO 4 SHOLD 5 APCSTT D- GND 6 7 LPSEL 8 / PM CLK_ A 9 / PM RDY 10 / PM D 11 D- GND 12 24V
TONER MOTOR
SENSOR/ MOTOR/ LSU
BPC
<BD HARNESS> (FFC)
24Vdup / DMT_ 0 / DMT_ 1 / DMT_ 2 / DMT_ 3 1 2 3 4 5 CN13(B5B-PH-K-S(LF))
B3B- PH- K- S 3 GND / SYNC 2 +5V 1
LB W H PK
LSU UNIT
DUPREX MOTOR
PM PWB
177622- 5 / PM LK C / PMRDY / PM D P- GND 24V
1 2 3 4 5
RD W H PL LB GY
MAIN MOTOR PWB

<MAIN MOTOER HARNESS> (FFC)
C
08FE- BT- VK- N
P- GND P- GND /M MRDY MD /M N.C P- GND SW 24V SW 24V 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN24(9604S-08F) 1 P- GND 2 P- GND 3 /M MRDY 4 /M MD 5 P- GND 6 P- GND 7 SW 24V 8 SW 24V
Paper exit interface PWB

<TRAY UNIT HARNESS>
SHIFTER MOTOR
HAND PAPER EMPTY SENSOR PWB
CN3(B6B-PH-K-R-(LF) RD) 24V 1 24V 2 SFTM A 3 SFTM B 4 / SFTMA 5 / SFTM B 6
B3B- PH- K- S <HAND PK LEDHPEM PTY 1 BL HPEM PTY 2 3 GY GND PK CN17(B4B-PH-K-S(LF)) PTY LEDHPEM BL 1 2 HPEM PTY N.C 3 4 G ND GY RD RD BL BL CN23(B2B-XH-RD(LF)) 24V 1 2 / PSRSOL
ENPTY SENSOR HARNESS> (FFC)
PS SOL
CN22(B2B-XH-A(LF)) 1 24V 2 / CPSOL
CN4(B3B-PH-K-K(LF)) LEDVCC 1 SFTHP 2 GND 3 CN5(B3B-PH-K-S(LF)) VFMOUT 1 / VFMCNT 2 P- GND 3
PK BL GY
<SHIFTER HP SENSOR HARNESS>
SHIFTER HP SENSOR PW B
PK BL GY 1 5V 2 SFTHP 3 G ND
INTERNAL COOLING FAN

CN6(B3B-PH-K-S(LF)) VFM OUT 1 / VFMCNT 2 P- GND 3
PICK UP SOL
INTERNAL COOLING FAN

B
175767- 3 LEDPIN 3 1 PIN 2 GND RD W H BL
RD <PEPER W H BL
IN SENSOR HARNESS>
CN20(B3B-PH-K- R(LF) RD) 1 LEDPIN 2 PIN 3 GND
CN26(9604S-23F) P- GND 1 24V 2 POUT 3 4 SFTHP / VFMCNT 5 VFM OUT 6 PDPX 7 DLD 8 / JOBS_ SFTDA 9 SFTDB 10 / SFTDA 11 / SFTDB 12 LFTDA 13 LFTDB 14 / LFTDA 15 / LFTDB 16 TRAY_ FULL 17 / TRAY_ D 18 / LFTHP 19 5VEN 20 D- GND 21 5V 22 P- GND 23
CN1(9604S-23F) 23 P- GND 22 24V 21 POUT 20 SFTHP 19 / VFM CNT 18 VFMOUT 17 PDPX 16 / JOBS_ DLD 15 SFTDA 14 SFTDB 13 / SFTDA 12 / SFTDB 11 LFTDA 10 LFTDB 9 / LFTDA 8 / LFTDB 7 TRAY_ FULL 6 TRAY_ D 5 LFTHP 4 5VEN 3 D- GND 2 5V 1 P- GND
P- OUT SENSOR PW B PK
BL GY 1 5V 2 3 CN7(B4B-PH-K-S(LF)) 5V 1 POUT 2 NC 3 GND 4 POUT

RD W H BL CN18(B3B-PH-K-K(LF) BK) 1 LEDCPEM TY P 2 CPEM PTY 3 GND
manuals4you.com
JS MOTOR (Option)
BL GY CN14(B3B-PH-K-KS(LF)) 1 CASETTE 2 N.C. 3 GND
6 5 4
PAPER IN SENSOR PW B
<CASEET ENPTY SENSOR HARNESS>
LOW SW ER ITCH
CN8(B3B-PH-K-R(LF)RD) PK / JOBS_ DLD 1 NC 2 GND 3 CN2(S6B-PH-K-R(LF) RD) 1 24V 2 24V 3 LFTM A 4 LFTM B 5 / LFTMA 6 / LFTMB GY
175767- 3 LEDPIN CPEMPTY GND
3 1 2
RD W H BL
SW
GND
CASETTE EMPTY SENSOR PW B
BL
<CASEET SWITCH HARNESS>
PK BL GY
DUP SENSOR PW B
CN9(B4B-PH-K-K(LF) BK) 5V 1 PDPX 2 NC 3 GND 4 1 2 3 4 5V PDPX NC G ND
15778- 2 GASETTE GND
1 2
GY
CASETTE SW ITCH PW B
Optical/unit
CN5(FF4-32-S15D3-FA)
MCU PWB
Optical / SPF
CCD PWB
CN47(B3B-PH-K-K(LF) BK)
OC COVER SEN SOR

179228-3 PK BL GY 3 1 2 5V 1 OCCO VER 2 GND 3
CN1(FF4-32-S15D5) GND 1 MODE 2 AFE DB0 3 AFE DB1 4 AFE DB2 5 AFE DB3 6 AFE DB4 7 AFE DB5 8 AFE DB6 9 AFE DB7 10 AFE SCK _ 11 GND 12 ADCLK 13 AFE _SEN 14 CCD_PHI1 15 GND 16 CCD PHI2 17 AFE_SD1 18 19 CCD_CP BSAMP 20 CCD_RS 21 22 GND CCD_TG 23 VSAMP 24 GND 25 3.3V 26 5VEN 27 GND 28 12V 29 12V 30 GND 31 GND 32 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BU7P-T R-P-H B7B- PH- K- S GND MODE AFE DB0 AFE DB1 AFE DB2 AFE DB3 AFE DB4 AFE DB5 AFE DB6 AFE DB7 AFE_ SCK GND ADCLK AFE_ SEN CCD_PHI1 GND CCD PHI2 AFE SD1 _ CCD_CP BSAMP CCD_RS GND CCD_TG VSAMP GND 3.3V 5VEN GND 12V 12V GND GND
<COPY LAMP HARNEES> (FFC)

1 2 3 4 P-GND (CL) (CLON) 24V
CN9 (17LE-132250-27 (D4AK)-FA)
CN8(9604S-04F)
SPF interface PWB
SENSOR PWB
7 W0 1 6 5V 2 5 W1 3 4 W2 4 3 W3 5 2 SPFCOVER 6 1 SGND 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 W0 5V W1 W2 W 3 SPFCOVER SGND
COPY LAMP UNIT

<SCANNER HP SENSERE HARNEES>
1 2 3 LEDMHPS MHPS GND
CN10(B3B-PH-K-R(LF) RD)
CN6 (B20B- PHDSS) W0 5 5V 1 W1 7 W2 9 W3 3 SPFCOVER 20 SGND 14
Mirror HP SENSOR PWB

<SPF HARNEES>
PK BL GY
CN5(B26B-PHDSS-B(LF))
/PSOL 24V1
6 11
BU2P-T R-P-H 1 SPFPSOL 1 2 24V1 2
SPF PSOL
MIRROR MOTOR
CN12(B4B-PH-S(LF)) 1 OUT_A + 2 OUT_B + 3 OUT_A OUT_B 4
PAPER FEED UNIT
DOCUMENT SENSOR (INCH ONLY)

(INCH ONLY)
CN48(B26B-PHDSS-B(LF))
1 2 3
L1
B
DOCUMENT SENSOR (AB ONLY)
179228-5 D- GND 2 1 DSIN2B 3 DSCLK# LED0# 5 4 5V
5V L1 SGND 5V L2 SGND
2 15 16 4 13 17
BU6P-T R-P-H 6 5V 1 5 L1 2 4 SGND 3 3 5V 4 2 L2 5 1 SGND 6
1 2 3
L2 ORIGNAL TRAY
SGND PULL UP PAPER
CN7 B3B-PH-K-S(LF)

179228-8 N.C. 5V LED3# LED2# LED1# DSIN3 DSCLK# D-GND 8 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 24V 24V /SPFMODB /SPFMODA SPFMODA SELIN3B SELIN2B PDOWNA SPFRSOL SPFPSOL P-GND D-GND D-GND P-GND YSPF /SPFCOVER SPFMODB SPFOPEN /S PFOUT SELIN1B SPFCLH SPFGSOL PDOWNB 5V PAPER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 24V 25 24V 26 6 /SPFMODB 18 /SPFMODA 16 SPFMODA SEL IN3B 7 SEL IN2B 5 PDOWNA 20 17 SPFRSOL 21 SPFPSOL P- GND 23 D- GND 9 D- GND 10 24 P- GND YSPF 11 2 /S PFCOVER SPFMODB 4 12 SPFOPEN 14 /S PFOUT SEL IN1B 3 SPFCLH 19 15 SPFGSOL PDOWNB 22 5V 13 1 PAPER 8 N.C
DOCUMENT SENSOR (INCH ONLY)
DOCUME SENSOR NT (AB ONLY)
179228-5 D-GND DSIN2A DSCLK# LED0# 5V
2 1 3 5 4
18 8 19
1 2 3
PAPER (Paper entry sensor)
SPF CLH
SPFONPEN (Book sensor)
1 2 3
1 2 3
24V1 N.C /C LH
/R SOL 24V1
10 12
SMP- 02V- BC 1 SPFRSOL 2 24V1
1 2 SMR- 02V- N
CN1 B3B-PH-K-R(LF) RD
179228-8 N.C . 8 7 DSIN0 6 DSCLK# D-GND 5 5V 4 3 LED3# 2 LED2# 1 LED1#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 D-GND D-GND DSIN2B / INCHJP DSCLK# LED0# 5V LED3# LED2# LED1# DSIN0 DSCLK# D- GND D-GND DSIN2A DSCLK# LED0# 5V LED3# LED2# LED1# DSIN3 DSCLK# /A BJP D-GND D-GND
SPF RSOL
(AB ONLY)
CN4 B2B- PH- K- S 1 24V1 /G SOL 2 1 2 3 SG ND SPFOPEN 5V
SPF GSOL
DSPF ONLY
A
/SPFOUT (Paper exit sensor)

1 2 3
CN2 B3B-PH-K-K(LF) BK
1 2 3
SGND / SPFOUT 5V
CN3 B7B- PH- K- S A 1 /A 2 /B 3 B 4 N.C . 5 24V1 6 24V1 7
3 1 6 4 2 5
A /A /B B 24V1 24V1
PLUSE MOTOR
JP2
MCU PWB
<PS HARNESS>
BK WH BK WH
P/ S PW (1/ 3) B
<AC SW HARNESS>

D
CN004(B06P-V L) LIVE 1 N.C. 2 NEUTRAL 3 LIVE 4 N.C. 5 NEUTRAL 6
AC SW
<PC FAN HARNESS>
GY GY GY BL OR BL OR BR PL RD BR RD GY PK LB BR GY GY CN102(B3B- PH-K - S) 1 PSFMOUT /PSFMCNT 2 GND 3 CN001(B03P-V L) LIVE 1 N.C. 2 NEUTRAL 3
CN101(B18B-P HDSS- B) 1 D-GND 2 P- GND 3 D-GND 4 3.3V 5VEN 5 6 3.3V 5V 7 8 /POFF FW 9 10 24V PR 11 12 24V P- GND 13 14 HLOUT 15 PSFMOUT 16 /PSFMCNT D-GND 17 18 P- GND
PS FUN
AC CODE
F- GND
C
NWAC- L N.C. NWAC- N
GY GY GY BL OR BL OR BR PL RD BR RD GY PK LB BR GY GY CN1(B7B- PH-K-S) 1 2 3
HVU PWB
CN3(B26B-P HDSS-K-S) D-GND 9 P- GND 10 D-GND 11 3.3V 14 5VEN 15 3.3V 16 5V 17 /POFF 18 FW 21 24V 19 PR 23 24V 20 P- GND 22 HLOUT 24 PSFMOUT 12 /P FMCNT 13 D-GND 25 P- GND 26 N.C 8 /M C 6 /T C 4 GRIDL 5 BIAS 3 P- GND 1 INT24 2 TC_ CONT 7 PL BR PK LB GY RD BR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 #250 MC BK /M C /T C GRIDL BAIS P- GND INT24 TC_ CONT
PL BR PK LB GY RD BR
<MC HARNESS>
1 2
NWAC- L 1 NWAC- N 2
TO NET WO BOX RK
Socket Holder
CN3(B3P-VH (BLACK)) PK 3 MCFB N.C. 2 WH GRID 1
<GB MCFB HARNESS>
CN2(B02P-NV) 1 DV BIAS 2 F- GND #250 TC WH
<TC HARNESS>
#187 TC
CN4(#187) BC R D
<BC HARNESS>
#187 BC
TC high voltage Holder
51010-0811
<DEV HARNESS>

RD RD PL BR GY 8 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 52025-0811 8 DV BIAS 1 +24V 2 TCS 5 DVSEL 6 GND 3 N.C. 4 N.C. 7 N.C.
manuals4you.com
TCS
OR LB PK GY TSR-04V-K2GG 2 +5V 4 (EP SDA) 3 (EP SCL) 1 GND PI8-F X-4P-D S 2 4 3 1
CN27(B4B- PH-K-S) 1 +24V TCS 2 DVSEL 3 P- GND 4
RD PL BR GY
CN29(B4B- PH- K-K)
+5V (EP_ SDA) (EP_ SCL) GND
1 2 3 4
OR LB PK GY
<SRU HARNESS> (SRU ONLY)
CRUM
DV UNIT
CN21(B2B- XH-K-K) (BLACK) OR 24V 1 PL /HPSOL 2 2 24V 1 1 /H PSOL 2 BU02P-T R-P-H
Hand paper pickup solenoid interface harness

HAND PAPER PICK UP SOL
CN25(B3B- PH- K-S) (WHITE) BK RTH_IN 1 2 N.C BK GND 3
THERMISTER
<THERMSTER HARNESS>
#250 #250
P/ S PWB(2/3)
<HL HARNESS>
BK
THERMOSTAT
<Fusing harness>
HL
WH
CN002(B04P-VL) 1 HEATER(L) 2 N.C. 3 N.C. 4 HEATER(N)
MCU PWB
KEY-LED PWB
<OPERATION PANEL HARNEES> <MCU-IF FFC>
(FFC)
LCD-BL PWB
INTERFACE PWB
OP / INTER FACE / INETER ROCK
USB1.1
CN1(9610-28B) GND 1 SENSE3 2 SENSE2 3 SENSE1 4 SENSE0 5 SCAN1 6 SCAN2 7 SCAN2 8 SCAN3 9 SCAN4 10 SCAN5 11 SCAN6 12 SCAN7 13 SCAN8 14 LED5 15 LED4 16 LED3 17 LED2 18 LED1 19 H_ LED 20 /LE DOUT1 21 /LEDOUT2 22 /LE DOUT3 23 /LE DOUT14 24 /LEDOUT15 25 /LEDOUT16 26 /LEDOUT17 27 GND 28 CN1(9610S-16B) D-GND 16 D-GND 15 3.3V 14 OPUSTS 13 OPUCMD 12 /OPUCRDY 11 /OPUSRDY 10 /P ANEL_ RST 9 8 3.3V 3.3V 7 6 5VEN 5VEN 5 D-GND 4 24V 3 D-GND 2 D-GND 1 CN38(9615S-16A-PP-A) D-GND 1 2 D-GND 3 / OPUWU 4 OPUSTS 5 OPUCMD 6 /OPUCRDY 7 /OPUSRDY 8 /PANEL_RST 9 3.3V 10 3.3V 11 5VEN 12 5VEN 13 D-GND 14 24V 15 D-GND 16 D-GND
CN2(9610-28B) 28 GND 27 SENSE3 26 SENSE2 25 SENSE1 24 SENSE0 23 SCAN1 22 SCAN2 21 SCAN2 20 SCAN3 19 SCAN4 18 SCAN5 17 SCAN6 16 SCAN7 15 SCAN8 14 LED5 13 LED4 12 LED3 11 LED2 10 LED1 9 H_LED 8 /LEDOUT1 7 /LEDOUT2 /LEDOUT3 6 /LEDOUT14 5 4 /LE DOUT15 3 /LE DOUT16 2 /LE DOUT17 1 GND
CN4(9604S-35F) GND 1 GND 2 VCC3 3 5VEN 4 5VEN 5 USBIN 6 D_CONT 7 VPOUT 8 VMOUT 9 OEN 10 RCV 11 VPIN 12 VMIN 13 SUSPENO 14 PARAD0 15 PARAD1 16 PARAD2 17 PARAD3 18 PARAD4 19 PARAD5 20 PARAD6 21 PARAD7 22 /REV 23 /FAULT 24 /A CK 25 BUSY 26 PE 27 SLCT 28 /INIT 29 /SLCTIN 30 /AUTOFD 31 /S TB 32 GDIN 33 GND 34 GND 35 CN4(9604S-35F) GND 35 GND 34 VCC3 33 5VEN 32 5VEN 31 USBIN 30 D_CONT 29 VPOUT 28 VMOUT 27 OEN 26 RCV 25 VPIN 24 VMIN 23 22 SUSPENO 21 PARAD0 20 PARAD1 19 PARAD2 18 PARAD3 17 PARAD4 16 PARAD5 15 PARAD6 14 PARAD7 /REV 13 /FAULT 12 /ACK 11 BUSY 10 PE 9 SLCT 8 /INIT 7 /SLCTIN 6 5 /AUTOFD /STB 4 GDIN 3 GND 2 GND 1
IEEE1284
FAX-KEY PWB (Option)

<SIDE COVER SWITCH HAENESS>
CN28(B3P-VH(LF)) RD 24V A-1 N.C. A- 2 24V1(DSWS) A- 3 RD
CN1(9610-16B)
SW
Front Cover SW
PK
SENSE6 SENSE5 SENSE4 SCAN 0 SCAN 1 SCAN 2 SCAN 3 SCAN 4 SCAN 5 SCAN 6 SCAN 7 SCAN 8 SCAN 9 / FAXSW FAXOPD GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CN3(9610-16B) 16 SENSE6 15 SENSE5 14 SENSE4 13 SCAN0 12 SCAN1 11 SCAN2 10 SCAN3 9 SCAN4 8 SCAN5 7 SCAN6 SCAN7 6 5 SCAN8 4 SCAN9 3 /FAXSW 2 FAXOPD 1 GND
SW
Side Cover SW
MCU PWB
CN37(1-171825-2)
Dehumidifier heater/Options
TO 2ND CS UNIT OR MULTI CS UNI T

24V P- GND /C V_ COP Y (CV _COUNT) (/ CV_ START) (/ CV_ CA) N.C. (/ CV_DPX) (/ CV_SIZE0) (/ CV_SIZE1) (/ CV_SIZE2) (/ CV_SIZE3) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
COIN VENDER (OPTION)
CN35(B13B-PH- K- S)
CNA(B22B-P HDSS- K- S) 24V 1 24V 2 3 (PSOL1) (FSOL1) 9 (PSOL2) 4 (FSOL2) 19 (PSOL3) 17 (FSOL3) 21 P- GND 5 P- GND 6 D-GND 7 D-GND 8 Y1 11 Y2 10 Y3 22 SELIN1C 20 SELIN2C 12 SELIN3C 18 5V 13 5V 15 N.C. 14 N.C. 16 (/ AUD_PNC) (/ AUD_COPY) (/ AUD_CA) /AUD_READY /AUD 5V P- GND 24V N.C FG (AUD_TC) (PNC-a) D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CN36(B20B-P HDSS-K-S ) 1 24V 2 24V 3 (PSOL1) 4 (FSOL1) 5 (PSOL2) 6 (FSOL2) 7 (PSOL3) 8 (FSOL3) 9 P- GND 10 P- GND 11 D-GND 12 D-GND 13 Y1 Y2 14 15 Y3 16 SELIN1C 17 SELIN2C 18 SELIN3C 19 5V 20 5V
AUDITOR (OPTION)
CN32(B4B- PH-K - R) +24V 1 2 N.C. 3 N.C. 4 /D HROFF
Dehumidifier heater SW
JAPAN ONLY
B
PS PW (3/ 3) B
CN003(B02P-XL) LIVE 1 NEUTRAL 2 BK WH B C

<DH SW HARNEES>
(172074-7) LIVE NE UTRAL (172074-7) (172074-1) DH- L B DH- N C (172074-1) A- 1 DH- L A- 1 A- 2 DH- N A- 2 (ELR-02VF) (ELP02V) DH- L DH- N (ELP02V) A- 1 DH- L A- 1 A- 2 DH- N A- 2 (ELR-02VF) (ELP02V) A- 1 A- 2 (ELR-02VF) A- 1 DH- L A- 1 A- 2 DH- N A- 2 (ELP(ELR-02VF) 02V)
6 5 4 3
manuals4you.com
DH1 DH2 JAPAN OPTION CASETTE ONLY A- 1 A- 1 DH- L DH3 A- 2 A- 2 DH- N

A
(ELP(ELR-02VF) 02V) A- 1 DH- L A- 1 A- 2 DH- N A- 2 (ELP(ELR-02VF) 02V)
DH4
Option
FAX PWB MCU PWB IMC2 PWB Memory (OPTION) Program
CN3(DIM2-SD72AR-113-F)
FAX / IMC2
LIU PWB
MJ1
MJ2
CN33(22FE- BT-V K- N) GND 1 GND 2 3.3V 3 3.3V 4 /OP_RST 5 6 /PRLINE 7 /ESPAGE /HSYNC 8 9 PIDATA0 PIDATA1 10 PIDATA2 11 PIDATA3 12 PIDATA4 13 PIDATA5 14 PIDATA6 15 PIDATA7 16 /PIREQ 17 /PIACK 18 /PIWR 19 /ESCRDY 20 ESCMD 21 GND 22
CN2(22FE- BT-V K- N) GND 22 GND 21 3.3V 20 3.3V 19 /OP _RST 18 17 /PRLINE 16 /ESPAGE /HSYNC 15 PIDATA0 14 13 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 12 PIDATA3 11 PIDATA4 10 PIDATA5 9 8 PIDATA6 7 PIDATA7 6 /PIREQ 5 /PIACK /PIWR 4 3 /ESCRDY ESCMD 2 GND 1
C
CN1(TX24-30R-12ST- H1) 1 DG 2 DG 3 +3.3V 4 +5VS 5 +24V 6 ARDX 7 RGDT8 AFERESABITCLK 9 AOUT 10 11 S13O UT CID12 SON 13 HS214 LIUID 15 +5V 16 17 AG HNDMUTE 18 19 AG 20 DG 21 MCLOCK 22 EXHSCION 23 24 ATXD 25 ASPCLKCID226 MRON 27 ECON 28 HS129 150V ON30
CN9(TX25-30P-6ST- H1) 1 DG 2 DG 3 +3. V 3 4 +5VS 5 +24V 6 ARDX 7 RGDT8 AFERES9 ABITCLK 10 AOUT 11 S13O UT 12 CID13 SON 14 HS215 LIUID 16 +5V 17 AG 18 HND MUTE 19 AG 20 DG 21 MCLOCK 22 EXHS23 CION 24 ATXD 25 ASPCLK26 CID227 MRON 28 ECON 29 HS130 150VON-
CN5(TX25-50P-23ST- H1) 1 /FAXDET 2 GND /FAXRE Z1P 3 4 /FAXCS0P 5 /FAXCRD Y 6 GDATA14 7 /FAXPAGE 8 GDATA13 /FAXSRDY 9 10 GDATA10 11 FAXCMD 12 GDATA7 13 FAXSTS 14 GDATA4 15 5VEN 16 /PRLINE 17 5V 18 (/ POFF) 19 GND 20 /READY 21 VCC3 VCC3 22 VCC3 23 VCC3 24 25 GND 26 GND 27 GND 28 /FAXPRD /FAXACK0P 29 30 GND GDATA15 31 GDATA11 32 GDATA12 33 34 GDATA8 GDATA9 35 36 GDATA5 37 GDATA6 38 GDATA2 39 GDATA3 40 GDATA0 41 GDATA1 /FAXCS1P 42 / FAXACK1P 43 /FAXREZ0P 44 /FAX_ RST 45 GND 46 24V 47 /HSYNC 48 24V 49 50 GND CN41(TX24-50P-12ST-H1) 1 /FAXDET 2 GND /FAXREZ1P 3 /FAXCS0P 4 /FAXCRD Y 5 GDATA14 6 7 /FAXPAGE 8 GDATA13 /FAXSRDY 9 10 GDATA10 11 FAXCMD 12 GDATA7 13 FAXSTS 14 GDATA4 15 5VEN 16 /PRLINE 17 5V 18 (/ POFF) 19 GND 20 /READY 21 VCC3 22 VCC3 23 VCC3 24 VCC3 25 GND 26 GND 27 GND 28 /FAXPRD 29 /FAXACK0P 30 GND 31 GDATA15 32 GDATA11 33 GDATA12 34 GDATA8 35 GDATA9 36 GDATA5 37 GDATA6 38 GDATA2 39 GDATA3 40 GDATA0 41 GDATA1 42 /FAXCS1P 43 /FAXACK1P 44 /FAXREZ0P 45 /FAX _RST 46 GND 47 24V 48 /H SYNC 49 24V 50 GND CN34(22FE- BT-V K- N) GND 1 GND 2 3.3V 3 3.3V 4 5V 5 6 /ESDET /SCLINE 7 8 /READY PODATA0/ESPRD 9 PODATA1 10 PODATA2 11 PODATA3 12 PODATA4 13 PODATA5 14 PODATA6 15 PODATA7 16 /POREQ 17 /POACK 18 /POCS 19 /ESSRDY 20 ESSTS 21 GND 22
CN3(22FE- BT-V K- N) 22 GND 21 GND 20 3.3V 19 3.3V 18 5V 17 /ESDET 16 /SCLINE 15 /READY PODATA0/ESPR 14 13 PODATA1 12 PODATA2 11 PODATA3 10 PODATA4 9 PODATA5 8 PODATA6 7 PODATA7 6 /POREQ 5 /POACK 4 /POCS 3 /ESSRDY 2 ESSTS 1 GND CN8

6 5 4 3
HAND SET
SPEAKER
CN10(MD-S6100-90) TX+ 1 RX2 RX3 TX4 GND 5 RHS6
USB2
CN7(B3B- PH- K- S (LF)) 1 SP+ 2 SP3 N.C.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
GND D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 VCC NC D15/A- 1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 /RP GND D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 A6 A9 GND A7 A8 A10 A11 D15/A-1 A12 D16 D17 GND /1CE A20 /2CE NC OE RY/B Y WP WE BYTE D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 VPP D24 D25 D26 D28 D27 VCC D29 D30 D31 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 NC
CN4(DIM2-SD72AR-113-F) 1 GND 2 D0 3 D1 4 D2 5 D3 6 D4 7 D5 8 D6 9 D7 10 VCC 11 NC 12 D15/A-1 13 A0 14 A1 15 A2 16 A3 17 A4 18 A5 19 /RP 20 GND 21 D8 22 D9 23 D10 24 D11 25 D12 26 D13 27 D14 28 A6 29 A9 30 GND 31 A7 32 A8 33 A10 34 A11 35 D15/A- 1 36 A12 37 D16 38 D17 39 GND 40 /1CE 41 A20 42 /2CE 43 NC 44 OE 45 RY/B Y 46 WP 47 WE 48 BYTE 49 D18 50 D19 51 D20 52 D21 53 D22 54 D23 55 VPP 56 D24 57 D25 58 D26 59 D28 60 D27 61 VCC 62 D29 63 D30 64 D31 65 A13 66 A14 67 A15 68 A16 69 A17 70 A18 71 A19 72 NC
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder. The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder> Solder composition code (Refer to the table at the right.) Solder composition Sn-Ag-Cu Sn-Ag-Bi Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu Sn-Zn-Bi Sn-In-Ag-Bi Sn-Cu-Ni Sn-Ag-Sb Bi-Sn-Ag-P Bi-Sn-Ag Solder composition code a b z i n s p
Lead-Free
5mm
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread. Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident. Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220C, which is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is confirmed. Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently. If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after completion of soldering work. If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
manuals4you.com
COPYRIGHT c 2004 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgments Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION Digital Document System Group QUALITY ENHANCEMENT CENTER Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2004 Nov Printed in Japan N
manuals4you.com
PARTS GUIDE
CODE:00ZARM206/004
DIGITAL COPIER
Revised Edition
MODEL
CONTENTS
AR-M206 AR-M161 AR-M207 AR-M162 AR-M165
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 F G H I
Exteriors Operation panel section Side door unit Optical unit 2nd,3rd mirror unit Middle frame unit Process unit
J K L M N O
Delivery frame unit TC case unit 250 sheets tray unit Packing material & Accessories 2nd Tray exteriors [AR-M206/AR-M207] 2nd Tray paper feeding unit [AR-M206/AR-M207] Index
DV cartridge unit Fusing unit Main driving unit Base plate unit 1 Base plate unit 2 Manual paper feeding multi unit
SHARP CORPORATION SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice.
DEFINITION
Rank Rank Rank Rank Rank A B E D C : : : : : Maintenance parts, and consumable parts which are not included in but closely related to maintenance parts Performance/function parts (sensors, clutches, and other electrical parts), consumable parts Unit parts including PWB Preparation parts (External fitting, packing, parts packed together) Parts other than the above (excluding sub components of PWB)
Because parts marked with "! is indispensable for the machine safety maintenance and operation, it must be replaced with " the parts specific to the product specification. F Other than this Parts Guide, please refer to documents Service Manual(including Circuit Diagram)of this model. F Please use the 13 digit code described in the right hand corner of front cover of the document, when you place an order. F For U.S. only-Use order codes provided in advertising literature. Do not order from parts department. [NOTE] * There patrs are supplied by SMF
<Note for use of the revised Parts Guide>

Interchangeability of parts is expressed by No1~6 as shown in the table below. <Interchangeability>
1 2 3 4 5 6
Interchangeable. Current type can be used in place of new type. New type cannot be used in place of current type. Current type cannot be used in place of new type. New type can be used in place of current type. Not interchangeable. Interchangeable if replaced with same types of releted parts in use. Others.
New & Addition, Change, Abolition, and Quantity change are expressed with the marks shown in the table below. <Change of Division>
New & Addition Change Abolition Q'uantity (increase) /Others Q'uantity (decrease) Correction
Running Change of Effective Time is expressed as R/C. <Effective Time>

R/ C
Running Change
manuals4you.com
Update : 2006/05/31
1 Exteriors
NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 GCOV-0064QSZZ 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 36 41 44 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 59 501 502 CFIX-0024QS07 PGLSP0003QSZZ PSHEZ0220QSZ1 GCAB-0068QSZZ CCOV-0046QS17 CCOV-0046QS23 CCOV-0046QS18 CARMP0010QS03 GCOV-0048QSZZ LX-BZ0750FCPZ GCAB-0071QSZ3 XHBS730P08000 GCAB-0102QSZ1 GCAB-0102QSZ3 PGIDM0110QSZZ XHBS730P06000 PGIDM0111QSZZ LFIX-0026QSZZ GCAB-0015QSEB GCAB-0015QSEC XEBS740P10000 LX-BZ0759FCPZ CGIDM0133QS01 GCAB-0101QSZZ CCAB-0101QS01 PSHEZ0088QSZ1 PMLT-0039QSZZ TLABH0458QSZZ TLABZ0058QSZZ LX-WZ1003HCZZ TLABH0322QSZZ TLABG0401QSZZ TLABZ4047FCZZ TLABZ5148FCZZ TLABZ5148FCZZ LX-BZ3008SCPS TLABM0520QSZZ TLABZ0059QSZZ TCAUA0770FCZZ CCOVH0010RS56 CFIX-0024RS56 AP AK BA AK AV AY AY AY AD AM AA AU AB AZ AZ AG AC AG AH AU AU AA AC AG AL AN AD AC AF AD AA AD AR AC AC AC AA AE AE AB BK BC D D B C D D D D C D C D C D D C C C C D D C C C D D C C D D C D D D D D C D D D E E
PARTS CODE
GCOVH0010QSE5 PCUSS0023QSZ1 CHNG-0007QS02 XEBS740P10000 GCAB-0104QSZZ GCOV-0064QSZ1
Inter- PRICE NEW PART change RANK MARK RANK BD D OC cover AV C OC mat AM C OC hinge AA C Screw(410) AL D Delivery left cabinet Rear cover AP D Rear cover Glass fixing plate Table glass Sheet Front cabinet Front cabinet cover Front cabinet cover Front cabinet cover Hinge arm Rear cabinet cover Screw(36) Left cabinet Screw(38) Rear cabinet Rear cabinet Hinge guide L Screw(36) Hinge guide R OC glass fixing Right cabinet Right cabinet Screw(410) Screw(36) OR guide unit Front right cabinet Front right cabinet Table glass sheet F OC cushion Operation label Class 1 label Poly slider(T=0.5) Scanning direction label Energy star label Energy star label Energy star label Energy star label Screw(38) Imagery label ECP label Service caution label OC cover unit Table unit
DESCRIPTION
[AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M165] [AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M165] [AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M165]
TR No.
Effective time
[AR-M161/AR-M162(U.S.A,Canada)/ AR-M206/AR-M207(U.S.A,Canada)] [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ AR-M207(Europe,Australia,New Zealand)]
[AR-M162] [AR-M165] [AR-M207]
[Form change]
05/12
06/04
(U.S.A,Canada) (Except U.S.A,Canada) [AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M165] (Except U.S.A,Canada)
(Hong Kong) (Europe) (Europe) (U.S.A,Canada,Australia,New Zealand) (U.S.A,Canada) (U.S.A,Canada) [AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M165]
06/07
1-1
Update : 2006/05/31
1 Exteriors
501
1 4 3
14 20 24 19 6
14
3 14 7 9 51 14 18 14 24 41 2 4
24 21 20
44
25
14 17 13 49 59 14 22
17
14
502
17 5 17 17 15
8 26
14
17 36 17 24 12 24 24 24 17 24 54 50 24 12 55 11 52 24 17 53 23 14 10 27
PRP03031
manuals4you.com
1-2
2 Operation panel section

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PARTS CODE
LX-BZ0750FCPZ GCAB-0103QSZZ JBTN-0087QSZZ JBTN-0088QSZZ JBTN-0085QSZZ CBTN-0086QS01 CBTN-0060QS01 CBTN-0061QS01 PFILZ0012QSZZ CBTN-0062QS01 LBOSZ0061QSZZ CPWBF0177QSE2 DHAI-0485QSZZ GCOV-0063QSZZ GCAB-0100QSZZ XEBS730P08000 CPNLH0042QS07 CPNLH0042QS06 CPNLH0043QS10 CPNLH0043QS09 CPNLH0043QS08 XEBS730P10000 LPLTP0379QSZZ DHAI-0479QSZZ PCOVP1468FCZZ DHAI-0487QSZZ HPNLH0041QSZZ PFILZ0015QSZZ XEBS730P08000 XHBS730P08000 CPWBX0176QSE2 CPWBX0176QSE3 DUNTK0534QSZZ VHI29L04058QS VHI29L0800LQS CBOX-0007QSH7 CBOX-0007QSH9 CBOX-0007QSI3 CBOX-0007QSI1 CBOX-0007QSH8 (Unit) CCAB-0103RS57 CCAB-0103RS53 CCAB-0103RS56 CCAB-0103RS60 CCAB-0103RS59 CCAB-0103RS58
17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
manuals4you.com
32 33 101
501
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AA C Screw(36) AS D Operation panel cabinet AC C Interruption key AD C Cross key AE C Operation key AG C Mode key AK C Ten key AE C Start key AS AC C Start key LG AF C CA key AC C Cross key boss AZ E KEY PWB AD C Key A harness AK D Operation panel cover AS D Operation panel bottom AC C Screw(38) BA D Main deco. panel(S-E) [AR-M161/AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)] AW D Main deco. panel(S-E) [AR-M162(U.S.A,Canada)] AY D Main deco. panel(D-E) [AR-M165/AR-M207](Germany,Switzerland) AX D Main deco. panel(D-E) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207](Other Countries) AX D Main deco. panel(D-E) [AR-M207(U.S.A,Canada)] AC C Screw(310) AF C LCD panel AG C OP-MCU harness AD C FAX battery cover AC C FAX key harness AH C FAX dummy AC C INFO cover AC C Screw(38) AB C Screw(38) BP E LCD PWB[Include No.101] (U.S.A,Canada) LCD PWB[Include No.101] BP N E (Except U.S.A,Canada,Denmark,Finland,Norway) BL E LCD unit AS B LCD Flash ROM[Contained in No.32] (U.S.A,Canada) LCD Flash ROM[Contained in No.32] AT N B (Except U.S.A,Canada,Denmark,Finland,Norway) BU E LCD box unit (U.S.A,Canada) BV E LCD box unit (Denmark,Finland,Norway) BV E LCD box unit (Poland,Hungary,Czech,Republic,Slovakia,Greece) BV E LCD box unit (Taiwan) BV E LCD box unit (Other Countries) BZ BZ BZ BZ BZ BZ E E E E E E Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation panel panel panel panel panel panel unit unit unit unit unit unit [AR-M161/AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)] [AR-M162(U.S.A,Canada)] [AR-M207(U.S.A,Canada)] [AR-M165/AR-M207](Denmark,Finland,Norway) [AR-M165/AR-M207](Germany,Switzerland) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207](Other Countries)
TR No.
Effective time
901
2-1
2 Operation panel section
1 17
23
24 18 11 12 16 16 15 33 26 25 26 25 14 25 PRP03032 26 25 32 16 22 16 16 16 21 9 4 8 10 3 6 5 19 7
16
16
13
901
20
501
manuals4you.com
2-2
Update : 2006/05/31
3 Side door unit

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 32 901
PARTS CODE
GDOR-0004QSZ1 LRALP0004QSZ2 XHBS730P10000 LPLTM0092QSZZ XHBS730P14000 LPLTM0091QSZZ LPLTM0091QSZ1 XEBS730P10000 LPLTM0090QSZZ LPLTM0090QSZ1 MSPRC0085QSZZ LFRM-0016QSZ5 XHBS730P16000 MSPRC0084QSZ1 MSPRC0083QSZ1 LHLDZ0033QSZ1 MSPRC0082QSZ1 CHLDZ0030RS55 NROLP0036QSZZ LBSHZ0303FCZZ XRESP40-06000 XPSSJ20-07000 NGERH0074QSZZ LPLTM0102QSZZ MSPRT0141GCA1 NROLP1122FCZZ MSPRC0319QSZZ JKNBZ0008QSZZ (Unit) CDOR-0004RS51 CDOR-0004RS52
Inter- PRICE NEW PART change RANK MARK RANK AQ D Right door AH C Right door rail AD C Screw(310) AF C Rail reinforce plate AA N C Screw(314) AE C Inner reinforce plate R 3 AE C Inner reinforce plate R AC C Screw(310) AE C Inner reinforce plate F 3 AE C Inner reinforce plate F AE C TC case GND spring AQ C Right door inner N AA N C Screw(316) AD C BC I/F electrode spring AD C TC I/F electrode spring AF C TC terminal I/F holder AC C Pressure spring AY E TC unit AP B DUP transport roller AC C M bushing C AA C E type ring(E4) AA C Spring pin(2-7) AD C DUP roller driving gear AD C DUP roller earth plate AB C FU PSV spring AF C PS upper roller AB C Right door knob spring AE C Right door knob BC BD E E
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
Effective time
[Form change]
06/04 R/C
[Form change]
06/04 R/C
[AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207]
Side door unit(Without No.16,18) Side door unit(Without No.16,18)
[AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207]
3 Side door unit
13 14 15
18 16
11 25 24 22 23
10 3 16 3 7 11 3 7 27 9 5 28 4 8 22 32 2 4 PRP03033 31 28 27 7 2 26 6 5 1 21
23
3-1
4 Optical unit
NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 49 50 52 53 56 58 59 60 62 63 64 66 67 70 71 72 79 80 81 82 83 85 86 87 88 89 90 ! 91 92 93 96 97 99 101 102
PARTS CODE
PWIR-0006QSPZ CMIR-0008QS37 PWIR-0005QSP1 LHLDZ0109QSZZ XBPS740P06K00 XHBS730P06000 PCASZ0010QSZZ CLNS-0006RS52 DHAI-0342QSZZ DHAI-0488QSZZ LBNDJ0043FCZ1 LPLTM0384QSZZ PSHEZ0500QSZZ LBNDJ0071FCZZ PMLT-0109QSZZ PMLT-0110QSZZ NPLYZ0016QSZZ NPLYZ0006QSZZ XRESP40-05000 PGUMS0004QSZZ CPWBF0147QSF3 XBBS730P08000 LHLDZ0104QSZZ LX-BZ0004QSPZ LRALM0007QSZ1 MSPRC0040QSZZ XBPS730P05K00 RMOTS0041QSZZ XBPS740P16KS0 CPLTM0312QS02 PGUMS0002QSZZ NGERH0165QSZZ LX-WZ0017GCZZ XRESP70-08000 NBLTT0037QSZZ XRESP50-06000 NBRGP0012QSZZ NPLYZ0032QSZZ LX-BZ0324FCPZ LX-BZ0049FCZZ NPLYZ0031QSZZ NSFTZ0071QSPZ NBRGP0011QSZZ LRALM0006QSZZ CDAIU0012QS13 LHLDZ0116QSZZ LX-BZ0750FCPZ PSHEZ0440QSZZ PSHEZ0448QSZZ PMLT-0033QSZZ PSHEZ0152QSZZ RCORF0018QSZZ PSHEZ0209QSZZ LPFTF0004QSZZ PSHEZ0418QSZZ LX-BZ0039FCZZ PSHEZ0420QSZZ PSHEZ0426QSZZ PTPE-0051QSZZ PSHEZ0273QSZZ PSHEZ0217QSZZ PTPE-0050QSZZ LPLTM0314QSZZ DHAI-0332QSZZ RINV-0002QSZZ LFIX-0023QSZZ MSLI-0138FCZZ MSPRP2825FCZZ PCUSF0334FCZZ PCUSU0203FCZZ PMIR-0164FCZZ PREFL0005QSZZ RLMPD0033QSZZ LDAIU0030QSZZ XEBS830P06000 TLABZ4335FCZZ PREFL0006QSZZ MARMP0054QSZ1 PCOVP0075QSZZ XNES730-24000
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AZ C MB wire F BA E 2nd,3rd mirror unit AZ C MB wire R AD C Wire holder AA N C Screw(46K) AC C Screw(36) AL C Dark box BY E Lens unit AG C CCD harness AD C OC cover harness AA C Cable band AE C Original detection shield plate AD C Manuscript detection shield sheet AC C Cable band(RSG-100) AC C Cushion ORG1 AC C Cushion ORG2 AF C Pulley AD C L pulley AA C E type ring(E4) AA C Table glass cushion AL E MHPS PWB AA C Screw(38) AD C CL lead holder AB C Screw(Red) AG C MB-B rail R AB C MB drive spring AA N C Screw(35K) BA B Mirror motor AB C Screw(416KS) AK C Mirror motor fixing plate AL C Protection rubber AE C Mirror motor idle gear AC C Washer AA C E type ring(E7) AL B Winder drive belt AA C E type ring(E5) AC C Winder bearing R AK C Winder drive shaft pulley AA C Screw(34) AB C Screw(46) AL C Winder pulley AQ C Winder drive shaft AC C Winder bearing F AG C MB-B rail F BF D Optical base plate AD C Paper fixing holder AA C Screw(36) AC C Optical front sheet AA C Optical base plate bottom sheet B AC C Optical cushion D AD C Optical bottom sheet AR C Ferrite core AB C CCD harness protect sheet A AB C Winder flange AC C Optical FR front sheet AB C Screw(44) AC C OP harness protect sheet AB C OP harness protect sheet B AC C OP harness fixing tape AB C CCD harness sheet AC C CCD harness protect sheet B AA C Core fixing tape AC C Wire support plate AE C CL harness AU E Inverter AC C Harness fixing plate AC C Slider AC C Mirror spring AP C Mirror cushion AE C Cushion AP B 1st mirror AH C Lamp reflector AS B Lamp AS D Lamp base AB C Screw(36) AB D High pressure cautions label AK C Sub reflector AD N C Arm AE D Harness cover AA N C Nut(M3)
TR No.
Effective time
(AB series)
manuals4you.com
4-1
4 Optical unit
NO.
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 ! 501
PARTS CODE
VHPGP2D03//-1 VHPGP2D07//-1 DHAI-0484QSZZ DHAI-0483QSZZ LHLDW1009ACZZ XHBS730P06000 VHPGP2D032/-1 RSNSZ0001QSZZ XBPS730P08X00 LPLTP0230QSZZ VHPGP1S73P+-1 MSPRD0232QSZZ MLEVP0077QSZZ LCRA-0002QSZZ PSHEZ0218QSZZ PSHEZ0219QSZZ LX-BZ0077QSZZ PSHEZ0254QSZZ PSHEZ0499QSZZ CREFL0005RS56
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK BA B Photo sensor(GP2D03) BA B Photo sensor(GP2D07) AL C OC detection harness AM C OC detection harness AA C Clamp AC C Screw(36) BA B Photo sensor(GP2D032) BA B Photo sensor(GP2D071) AA N C Screw(38X) AF C Open/close sensor fixing plate AF B Photo transistor(GP1S73P) AB C Return spring AC C Open/Close actuator AC C Mini clump AC C Edge protect sheet A AC C Edge protect sheet B AB C Screw AC C Optical bottom sheet AF C Manuscript detection shield sheet BD E Copy lamp unit
TR No. (Inch (AB (Inch (AB series) series) series) series)
Effective time
(Inch series) (AB series)
(Inch series)
4-2
4 Optical unit
501
97 93 90
93
93 91 92 85 96 93
93 88 86 93 80 93 81 5 4 2 6 6 1 5 4 6 9 26 7 18 19 18 19 101 20 22 23 102 A 104 INCH 106 Series 107 108 106 107 13 72 60 21 26 115 105 105 21 27 47 116 26 53 15 116 52 67 36 63 16 56 42 49 99 50 53 53 46 41 43 53 53 44 58 26 48 53 53 56
21 21
85
89 3 88 85 80 86 93 93
82
83 87
59 79
8 112 110 111 10 28 31 30 29 29 31 11

21
20 104 102 118 104 103 INCH Series
12 105
14 21 26
108 25 109 33 11 37
114 103 21 117
34
33 11
32 70
35 67 20
113
38 39 41 43 53 42
71
66 66
40 62 64
PRP03034
manuals4you.com
4-3
5 2nd,3rd mirror unit

NO.
1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 901
PARTS CODE
LHLDZ0044QSZ2 XBPS740P06KS0 NPLYZ0017QSZZ LHLDZ0013QSZZ MSLI-0138FCZZ LX-BZ0335FCPZ CPLTM0156QS03 PCUSS0009QSZZ LFIX-0284FCZZ PMIR-0008QSZ1 CPLTM0155QS03 PCUSS0201FCZZ PSPAZ0011QSZZ PMLT-0084QSZZ LX-WZ0001GCZZ (Unit) CMIR-0008QS37
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AN C 2nd,3rd mirror holder AB N C Screw(46KS) AE C W pulley AD C CL guide holder AC C Slider AB C Screw(46)(Red) AH C Pulley fixing plate R AA C MB-B cushion R AC C 2nd,3rd mirror fixing plate F BA B 2nd,3rd mirror AH C Pulley fixing plate F AA C MB-B cushion AD C Mirror spacer AB C 2nd,3rd mirror cushion AB C Washer BA E 2nd,3rd mirror unit
TR No.
Effective time
5 2nd,3rd mirror unit
5 4 17 15 1 4 17 3 7 9 7 10 11 12 8 11 8 13 14 11 PRP03035 11 12 3 8 8
16
5-1
6 Middle frame unit

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 46
PARTS CODE
XEPS723P12000 CSW-M0007RS55 NCPL-0007QSZ1 MSPRC0024QSZZ RMOTD0035QSPZ XEBS730P10000 DUNTK0343RS12 DHAI-0322QSZZ XBPSC30P06ES0 CHAI-0109RS52 CHAI-0107RS52 MSPRD0104QSZZ MSPRD0103QSZZ MSPRD0102QSZZ LHLDZ0038QSZ1 XEBS730P08000 XEBS730P10000 LHLDZ0039QSZZ LPLTM0067QSZZ XEBS730P06000 DHAI-0106QSZ2 DHAI-0108QSZ1 MSPRC0278QSZZ XRESP40-06000 NSFTZ0021QSP1 NKOM-0001QSZZ MSPRD0139QSZZ XEBS730P06000 LBOSZ1508FCZZ PPIPP0174FCZZ MSPRC0106QSZZ XPSSJ20-07000 NGERH0062QSZZ NBRGC0018QSZZ XRESP60-08000 NROLP0032QSP2 JKNBZ0010QSZZ XBPS730P10KS0 LFRM-0024QSZ3 LFRM-0024QSZ5 LPINS0300FCZZ
47 LPINS0301FCZZ 49 51 53 54 55 56 57 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 101 701 PSHEZ0056QSZZ LANGT0003QSZ1 TCAUH0007QSZZ LBNDJ0013FCZ1 LPLTM0149QSZZ LX-BZ0020QSPZ DHAI-0333QSZZ LSTPP0014QSZZ MSPRD0298QSZZ LHLDZ0099QSZZ DHAI-0321QSZZ XEPS730P14X00 XHBS730P06000 LX-WZ0198FCZZ LX-WZ1003HCZZ MSPRC0339QSZZ RMOTN0022QSPZ LPLTM0389QSZZ
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AA N C Screw(2.312) AS B Interlock switch unit AC C Hopper coupling AA C Hopper spring AX B Toner motor AC C Screw(310) BR E LSU[Include No.101] AS C DEV harness AA C Screw(36ES) AN C GB-MCFB harness unit AM C MC harness unit AC C HV terminal spring (case) AC C HV terminal spring (grid) AC C HV terminal spring (saw) AH C High voltage terminal holder AC C Screw(38) AC C Screw(310) AE C High voltage terminal holder TC AC C TC terminal plate AA C Screw(36) AK C BC harness AH C TC harness AC C PS pressure spring AA C E type ring(E4) AN C PS follower roller shaft AD C PS collar(12) AB C PS earth spring AA C Screw(36) AG C Cam boss A2 AC C Pipe C AF C PS clutch spring AA C Spring pin(2-7) AK C Clutch gear(32T) AD C Bearing E AA C E type ring(E6) AT B PS transport roller AD C PS knob AB N C Screw(310KS) BC C Middle frame 5 BA C Middle frame [With No.701,9-63,701] DV guide pin [AR-M161/AR-M162(U.S.A,Canada)/AR-M206/ AD C AR-M207(Other Countries)] DV guide pin [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ AD C AR-M207(Other Countries)] AC C PS rear guide sheet AC C SRU fixing angle AD D Laser caution label AE C Cable band AD C Connector fixing plate AB C Screw AL C SRU harness AC C Right door stopper AD C Stopper spring AC C Stopper holder AH C LSU harness AB N C Screw(314X) AC C Screw(36) AA C Poly slider(T=0.13) AA C Poly slider(T=0.5) AD C PS brake spring BL B Polygon motor[Contained in No.7] 5 AK C Fusing fixing plate [With No.46,9-63,701]
TR No.
Effective time
DCE582
05/08
05/08
manuals4you.com
6-1
6 Middle frame unit
53 64 63 64
64 64 7 6 5 10 701 1 3 4 8 6 9 11 56
54 16 55 65 57 15 16 18 18
18 47 2 6 9 12 13 14 16
51
21 26 22 46 68 67 27 28
24 23 26 22 25 23 29 49 29
30
38 31 39
36 49 40 37
35
34
33
27
66 62 61 60 16 42 41
39 38
PRP03036
manuals4you
.com
6-2
Update : 2006/04/28
7 Process unit
NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 101 102 501
PARTS CODE
XEBS730P10000 CHLDZ0035RS55 UCLEZ0009QSZ2 CFRM-0021RS6K CFRM-0021RS6M PSEL-0130QSZZ PSEL-0129QSZZ NCPL-0003QSZ1 LHLDZ0045QSZZ LHLDZ0098QSZ2 LX-WZ0329FCZZ LX-RZ0001QSZZ PTME-0033QSZZ PRNGF0106FCZ2 LX-RZ0001QSZZ NBRGP0299FCPZ NSFTZ0020QSZZ PMLT-0018QSZ1 PCAPH0009QSZZ NSFTZ0019QSZZ PSPAZ0696FCZZ PPIPP0005QSZZ NGERH0039QSZZ MSPRC0045QSZZ PSHT-0004QSZ1 NGERH0036QSZZ NGERH0038QSZZ NGERH0037QSZZ LFIX-0007QSZ1 PCOVP0093QSZZ PSHEP0135QSZ1 LHLDZ0036QSZZ PCASZ0007QSZZ XEBS726P05000 LPLTM0062QSZ1 LHLDZ0035QSZ1 QTANP0004QSZZ QTANP0007QSZZ PTPE-0005QSZZ LPLTM0386QSZZ XEBS726P06000 CPIPP0005RS51 CTME-0033RS51 PSHEZ0501QSZZ PSHEZ0502QSZZ PSHEZ0513QSZZ PTPE-0026QSZZ CFRM-0021RS6L CFRM-0021RS6N
Inter- PRICE NEW PART change RANK MARK RANK AC C Screw(310) BG E MC holder unit AQ A Cleaning blade AY E Process sub unit AY E Process sub unit AF C Seal R AF C Seal F AC C Screw coupling AD C Starling holder AD C Pawl holder AB C Washer AB C Starling(5) AK A Separator pawl AC C Starling N2 AB C Starling(5) AD C CL bearing(M5) AL C Transport screw AC C Transport screw cushion AC C Toner pipe cap AE C Transport pipe screw AC C Pipe cap spacer AM C Toner sleeve AE C Transport pipe gear(14T) AA C Toner pipe spring AC C Toner pipe shutter AC C Transport screw gear(30T) AC C Transport pipe gear(15T) AC C Idle gear(26T) AE C Drum fixing plate B AE C Drum cover AB C MC guide sheet R AF C Grid tension holder AN C MC case AA N C Screw(2.65) AG B Grid AP C MC holder AD C Terminal AC C Grid terminal AG C Tape AG N C Sawtooth plate AD C Screw(2.66) AP E Toner pipe unit AL E Separator pawl unit AD C Drum MG sheet A AD C Drum MG sheet B 3 AK C Paper dust stirring sheet 3 AA C Screw tape BE E Process frame unit BF E Process frame unit
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
Effective time
(U.S.A,Canada) (Except U.S.A,Canada)
(U.S.A,Canada) (Except U.S.A,Canada) (U.S.A,Canada) (U.S.A,Canada) (Except U.S.A,Canada) (Except U.S.A,Canada) (Except U.S.A,Canada)
(Except U.S.A,Canada)
DCE608 DCE608
06/02 06/02
(U.S.A,Canada) (Except U.S.A,Canada)
manuals4you.com
7-1
Update : 2006/04/28
7 Process unit
38 1 38 45 36 37 38 42 35 40 1 1 21 35 22 23 24 6 13 13 14 12 15 12 14 13 15 12 17 16 14 15 13 47 12 17 16 14 15 47 17 16 47 17 16 25 32 30 29 43 39 44 1 5 3 48 49 4 9 41 1 2
501
46
47
26 27 1 28
102
18 31 102 101 19 PRP03037 20
7-2
8 DV cartridge unit
NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 46 47 48 49 50 501 502 503 901
PARTS CODE
PGIDM0088QSZZ XEBS730P08000 LX-BZ0027QSPZ PGIDM0089QSZ1 PSEL-0065QSZ1 PSEL-0066QSZ1 PSEL-0067QSZ4 PSEL-0105QSZZ PSHEP0262QSZZ XBBS740P10000 PCOVP0072QS12 PMLT-0002YSZ1 PMLT-0005YSZZ PBOX-0001YS13 NROLP0072QSP1 PMLT-0006YSZZ NBRGC0020QSZZ NGERH0002YSZZ XEBS730P08000 NGERH0001YSZZ NBRGC0021QSZZ XRESP50-06000 NGERH0145QSZ1 PSHEP0035YSZZ PSHEG0504QSZZ NROLM0121QSZZ LPLTM0002YSZ2 LPLTM0001YSZZ XBPBZ30P03000 LHLDZ0001YSZZ RDTCM0017QSZZ XUBUZ30P08000 MSPRK0001YSZZ LHLDR0072QSZZ XBPS730P06KS0 LPLTM6022FCZZ PSEL-0063QSZZ PCOVP0080QSZZ XEBS730P10000 XRESP30-06000 PSEL-0001YSZ1 PSEL-0074QSZZ PSPAP0036QSZZ PSHEP0324QSZZ PSEL-0114QSZZ PSEL-0115QSZZ DHAI-0313QSZZ CBOX-0001JS5H CCOVP0072RS56 CGIDM0089RS53 (Unit) DUNT-0207RS16
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AP D Upper toner guide AC C Screw(38) AD C DV fixing screw AQ D Lower toner guide AA C TG seal LUAR AC C TG seal LRAR AG C TG seal LDAR AA C TN seal FR AC C DV-UND sheet AA C Screw(410) AH D DV cover AC C DV TH cushion AB C DV side cushion L AM D DV box AP C DMX roller AB C DV side cushion R AH C DMX bearing AD B DV gear(28T) AC C Screw(38) AD C DV idle gear(20T) AD C DID bearing AA C E type ring(E5) AD B DV gear(18T) AB A DV side sheet N AD C Sheet BA B MG roller G AP C Doctor reinforce plate AN A Doctor AB C Screw(33) AD C Bearing holder AY B ATC sensor G AA C Screw(38) AB C Bias spring AC C MG holder AB N C Screw(36KS) AC C M4 plate AA C DVS seal LRU AE C DV cover F AC C Screw(310) AA C E type ring(E3) AE B DV blade AC C TG seal BU AC C TGU spacer FL AC C DVB sheet AC C Seal F AD C Seal F2 AH C Sensor harness BL E DV box unit AS E DV cover unit(Without No.42) AY E TN guide unit BN E DV unit
TR No.
Effective time
manuals4you.com
8-1
8 DV cartridge unit
10 10 1 2 2 7 43 2 37 11
502
36
503
41 3 37 12 46 5 4 15 8 13 48 12 14 47 12 19 47 24 49 19 17 30 22 38 A 33 31 32 32 19 19 29 19 19 34 A 27 26 9 36 A 6 36 16 17
42 18
501
19 50 19 20 23 35 21
25 24
17
28
29
29
39
PRP03038
8-2
Update : 2006/04/28
9 Fusing unit
NO.
1 2 3 4 5 ! ! 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 25 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 46 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 501 701 901
PARTS CODE
XBPS730P06KS0 RTHM-0001QSZZ DHAI-0184QSZ1 XHBS730P06000 PCOVP0029QSZ6 RLMPU0015QSZZ RLMPU0016QSZZ LSTPP0116FCZZ NBRGP0567FCZZ XBPS730P08KS0 CFRM-0017QS01 NROLI0030QSZZ CFRM-0018QS01 NGERH0540FCZ3 LHLDZ0034QSZZ XBPS730P10KS0 RDTCT0005QSZ1 LPLTM0050QSZ1 MSPRT0086QSZZ PGIDM0034QSZ6 XEBS730P06000 XBBS730P06000 LPLTP0051QSZZ PGIDH0131QSZ1 PGIDH0131QSZ2 NROLR0031QSP1 NBRGP0260FCZ1 XRESP30-06000 LX-BZ0013QSP1 MSPRP0087QSZZ MSPRT0303QSZZ MLEVP0018QSZ1 MLEVP0019QSZ3 MLEVP0020QSZ3 MLEVP0017QSZ1 PTME-0020GCZ1 TLABH0062QSZZ LFRM-0036QSZ2 LPLTP0060QSZ4 MLEVP0026QSZ2 MSPRD0117QSZZ MSPRD0118QSZ1 PSHEZ0105QSZZ LX-WZ0313FCZZ VRH-ST2HB157K PBRSR0004QSZ1 PTME-0014QSZZ MSPRD0122QSZZ MSPRD0121QSZZ XWHS730-05070 LX-WZ0001QSZZ TLABH0364QSZZ LX-WZ7021SCPZ CPLTM0255QS01 PGIDM0102QSZZ PGIDM0103QSZZ XHBS730P08000 XEBS740P12000 XEBS740P14000 CPLTP0060RS52 LX-BZ0080QSZZ (Unit) DUNTW0524RSZZ DUNTW0524RS12
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AB N C Screw(36KS) AM B Thermostat AE C Fusing harness AC C Screw(36) AT D Fusing cover BA B Heater lamp (120V series) BA B Heater lamp (230V series) AA C Roller stopper A2 AG A Fusing bearing AB N C Screw(38KS) AH C Fusing frame F BC A Upper heat roller AH C Fusing frame R AD B Fusing gear(45T) AF C Lamp holder AB N C Screw(310KS) AN B Thermistor AM C Fusing joint plate AB C Upper pawl pressure spring AL C Fusing rear paper guide AA C Screw(36) AC C Screw(36) AD C PG fixing plate AU C Fusing front paper guide 1 AU C Fusing front paper guide BB A Pressure roller AD C Pressure bearing N AA C E type ring(E3) AD C Screw(37) AC C PG earth spring AD C Pressure spring B AF C Fusing pressure lever F AE C Release lever F AE C Release lever R AF C Fusing pressure lever R AF A Separator pawl AE D High temperature caution label AS C Fusing lower frame AM C Reverse gate AE C DMC actuator AB C Rotation spring AB C Actuator return spring AC C Fusing sheet AA C Washer AD C Resistor(1/2W 150M 10%) AD B Discharge brush AK A Lower separator pawl AB C Separator pawl spring R AB C Separator pawl spring F AA N C Washer (AB series) AC C Separator pawl washer AA D Green label AA C Washer AS C FU felt fixing plate AD C Fusing front guide F (AB series) AD C Fusing front guide R (AB series) AB C Screw(38) AA C Screw(412) 5 AB C Screw(414) [With No.701,6-46,6-701] AR E Reverse gate unit 5 AC C Fusing fixing screw [With No.63,6-46,6-701] BU BV E E Fusing unit Fusing unit (120V series) (230V series)
TR No.
Effective time
06/07
05/08 05/08
manuals4you.com
9-1
Update : 2006/04/28
9 Fusing unit
1 61 3 2 B 62 8 13
14
4 12 5 6 11 62 15 16 60 49 50 8 7 10 9 46 27 29 30 1 25 51 53 28 39 40 A 35 32 34 57 33 41 43 51 52 51 53 22 31 B
701 701
63
46 4
17 21
54 58 9 A
21 59
4 55 37 18 55 37 18 55 37 18 37 48 28 20
18
4 4 55
23 29 30
51 32 52 36 57 44
48
42
501
PRP03039
9-2
F Main driving unit

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 501 502
PARTS CODE
PGIDM0104QSZZ XHBS730P08000 DHAI-0110QSZ1 DHAI-0327QSZZ DHAI-0323QSZZ XBBS740P08000 RMOTP0044QSPA PTME-0032QSZ1 MSPRC1318FCZ1 RPLU-0009QSZ1 LPLTM0048QSZZ XRESP40-06000 PTME-0012QSZZ RPLU-0008QSZ1 XBBS730P04000 CPLTM0047QS06 CPLTM0047QS07 NGERH0010QSZZ NGERH0009QSZZ NGERH0014QSZZ NGERH0011QSZZ MSPRC2132FCZ1 NCPL-0004FCZZ NGERH0052QSZZ NGERH0007QSZZ NGERH0057QSZZ NGERH0008QSZ5 NGERH0059QSZZ NGERH0012QSZZ NGERH0058QSZZ NGERH0013QSZZ NGERH0016QSZZ MSPRC0081QSZZ NGERH0055QSZZ NGERH0056QSZZ LX-WZ0314FCZZ NGERH0054QSZZ QCNCM0999FCZZ XRESP40-06000 LX-WZ0002QSZZ NGERH0053QSZZ CGERH0011RS51 CPLTM0047RS81 CPLTM0047RS82 (Unit) CPLTM0047RS61 CPLTM0047RS62
Inter- PRICE NEW PART change RANK MARK RANK AK C Harness guide AB C Screw(38) AL C HL harness AD C HND SOL harness AC C Main motor harness AA C Screw(48) BH B Main motor AD C Roller pawl AA C Spring B AM B Solenoid CSA AF C Drive earth plate AA C E type ring(E4) AC C PS clutch pawl AM B Solenoid PS AA N C Screw(34) AZ C Main drive plate DUP AZ C Main drive plate DUP AD C Gear(28T) AD C Gear(46/16T) AD C Gear(30/15T) AD C MG gear AA C MG roller spring AB C Coupling B AE C Gear(38/18T) AH C Gear(68/26T) AE C Gear(41T) AH C Gear(55/19T) AD C Gear(23/27T) AE C Gear(20T) AF C Gear(21/17T) AG C Gear(31/17T) AD C Coupling gear(34T) AB C HT ratchet spring AE C Ratchet gear(44T) AE C Ratchet gear(33T) AA C Poly slider AD C Gear(33/20T) AC C I/F connector AA C E type ring(E4) AB C PO belt washer AD C Gear AE E MG gear unit BE E Driving sub unit BE E Driving sub unit BL BL E E Driving unit(Without No.5) Driving unit(Without No.5)
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
Effective time
[AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207]
[AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] [AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207]
901
manuals4you.com
10-1
F Main driving unit
5 6 3 7 1 6 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 17 26 28 31 29 32 30 30 19 12 19 37 36 38 33 17 34 35 9 16 43 9 8 10 2 11 41 42 2
4
40
501
24 27
25
502
PRP03040
10-2
G Base plate unit 1

NO.
1 2 6 7 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 49 52 55 56 57 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 501 502 503
PARTS CODE
QSW-B0017QSZZ DHAI-0315QSZZ LPLTM0065QSZZ XEPS740P12000 XEBS730P08000 GDAI-0002QSE1 XRESP40-06000 LBOSZ1031FCZZ MSPRC0161QSZZ PPIPP0006QSZZ NGERH0060QSZZ XRESP50-06000 NBRGP0007QSZZ XEBS740P12000 PSHEZ0133QSZZ CPWBF0147QSE4 MLEVP0023QSZZ PCOVP0033QSZ1 LRALP0014QSEZ PSHEZ0378QSZZ LPLTP0348QSZZ MSPRC0301QSZZ PFTA-0018QSZZ MLEVP0024QSZZ LDAIS0029QSZZ MSPRD0233QSZ1 LHLDZ0100QSZZ LHLDZ0100QSZ1 MSPRD0300QSZZ MLEVP0091QSZZ GLEGG0064FCZZ MLEVP0044QSZZ XRESP70-08000 NGERH0078QSZZ NGERH1169FCZZ CPLTM0114QS02 LPLTM0112QSZZ XEBS740P14000 LPLTM0125QSZZ PSPAZ0024QSZZ PSHEZ0187QSZZ PSHEZ0186QSZZ PCOVP0091QSZZ VHPGP1S73P+-1 DHAI-0318QSZZ DHAI-0316QSZZ PCLR-0010QSZZ NSFTZ0066QSPZ LHLDR0095QSZZ XEBS730P12000 LBRCR0011QSZZ PGUMM0013QSZZ PCLR-0011QSZZ LBRC-0012QSZZ MSPRD0340QSZZ NKOM-0009QSZZ NSFTZ0064QSZZ MSPRD0148QSZZ CSFTZ0066RS73 CGUMM0013RS51 CDAIS0029RS52
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AF B Tray detect switch AD C Tray switch harness AL C Base reinforce plate F AB C Screw(412) AC C Screw(38) BF D Base plate AA C E type ring(E4) AC C Clutch boss AF C Clutch spring AD C Clutch sleeve AH C Clutch gear(34T) AA C E type ring(E5) AD C Bearing(6) AA C Screw(412) AD C Paper feeding sheet AL E Manual paper feeding sensor PWB AE C MF sensor actuator AF C Manual feed sensor cover AM C Base plate rail R AG C Sheet AC C Pressure plate AD C Pressure plate spring AE C Pressure plate cover AF C Sensor lever AD D Sensor base AC C MF actuator spring AD C PS holder 3 AD C PS holder [Form change] AD C PS front actuator spring AD C PS front actuator AC C Rubber foot AE C MF sensor actuator 2 AA C E type ring(E7) AE C Joint gear(39/33T) AF C 2nd joint gear AG C Joint gear fixing plate AE C Adjustment plate [AR-M206/AR-M207] AB C Screw(414) [AR-M206/AR-M207] AD C Blind plate AB C 2nd joint spacer AB C PS guide sheet R [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AB C PS guide sheet F [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AC C PS sensor cover AF B Photo transistor(GP1S73P) AE C Pin harness AE C CAS EMP harness AC C Collar AP C Roller shaft AD C Paper feed roller holder AC C Screw(312) AD C Paper feed roller bracket AG C Paper feed roller rubber AC C Roller collar AD C Collar bracket AC C Collar spring AC C Manual paper collar AD C Roller shaft AB C Sensor spring AV E Paper feeding shaft unit AN E Paper feed roller rubber unit AM E Sensor base unit
TR No.
Effective time
06/01 R/C
manuals4you.com
11-1
G Base plate unit 1
52 1 2 41 49 48 12 18 48 17 55 49 48 23 41 76 35 11 24 18 73 69 70 19 67 69 70 37 38 11 39 67 68 45 16 15 14 13 43
44
46 22 42 25 26
manuals4you.com
49
56
33
503
57
72 29 30
28
7 7 6
63 61 11 7 60 62 49 61 32 48
75 31
74
502
65
11 22 27 22 71
11
502
66 68 71
501
PRP03041
11-2
H Base plate unit 2

NO.
1 2 3 5 6 7 ! ! 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
PARTS CODE
LSOU-0036QSZZ GCAB-0069QSZZ XEBS740P10000 CPWBF0114QSE8 CPWBF0114QSE9 NFANP0010QSZZ XBPS730P32KS0 RDENC0015QS11 RDENC0015QS12 QSW-C9292QCPZ XBPS730P08KS0 RDENC0017QSZZ LPLTM0082QSZ7 XHBS730P06000 LFRM-0067QSZZ XEBS740P12000 LFRM-0068QSZ1 XBPSN40P06K00 QACCDR614QCPZ QACCBR421QCPZ QACCLR421QCPZ QACCER624QCPZ QPLGA0009QCZZ QPLGA4171CCZZ PHOG-1023CCZZ DHAI-0122QSZ1 LX-BZ0705FCPZ LPLTM0308QSZZ GDAI-0002QSE1 LFRM-0025QSZ3 LPLTM0099QSZ2 LFRM-0026QSZ2 XHBS730P14000 XEBS730P10000 LX-BZ0700FCPZ XHBS730P08000 CPLTM0071QS03 LPLTM0347QSZZ XHBS730P08000 LX-BZ0031QSPZ LX-BZ0750FCPZ NBLTT0007QSZZ CPWBX0175QS32 CPWBX0175QS36 CPWBX0175QS31 CPWBX0175QS39 GCOV-0066QSZZ LPLTM0307QSZ1 LPLTM0309QSZZ LX-BZ0039QSPZ XHBS730P08000 LBNDJ0037FCZ1 LHLDW0086QSZZ XEBS730P18000 XWSS730-07000 XWHS730-05080 QTANN0015FCZZ DHAI-0140QSZ1 DHAI-0320QSZZ LFIX-0016FCZZ XEPS740P30000 XEBS740P12000 XWSS740-10000 XWHS740-08100 DHAI-0328QSZZ LPLTM0382QSZZ LPLTM0306QSZ1 PSHEZ0135QSZZ XWHS740-08100 XEBS730P08000 PSHEZ0421QSZZ CSW-M0007RS55 PSHEZ0408QSZZ LPLTM0303QSZZ XBPS720P09000
! ! ! ! ! !
18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 60 61 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK BA D Delivery tray AT D Delivery rear cover AA C Screw(410) AZ E I/F PWB (U.S.A,Canada) AZ N E I/F PWB (Except U.S.A,Canada) AS B PS fan AC C Screw(332KS) BV E Low voltage power supply unit (120V series) BV E Low voltage power supply unit (230V series Except South Africa) AN B AC switch AB N C Screw(38KS) BE E High voltage power supply unit AF C PS PWB fixing plate AC C Screw(36) AK C Corner frame FL AA C Screw(412) AQ C Corner frame RL AA C Screw(46K) AS B AC cord (U.S.A,Canada) AZ B AC cord (U.kingdom) AW B AC cord (Australia,New Zealand) AC cord (Germany,Switzerland,STCL,France,Holland, AW B Spain,Italy,Denmark,Finland,Norway) AS B Plug (Hong Kong,Singapore) AN B Plug (South Africa) AB C Plug protector [AR-M161/AR-M206 Except STCL] AK C AC switch harness AC C Screw [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/AR-M207(Europe)] AL C Corner frame reinforce plate BF D Base plate AH C Corner flame FR AK C Corner frame R reinforce plate AN C Corner frame RR AA N C Screw(314) AC C Screw(310) AB C Screw(412) AB C Screw(38) AF C Drive joint plate [AR-M161/AR-M162] AG C Net box fixing plate AB C Screw(38) [AR-M161/AR-M162] AE C Screw AA C Screw(36) AH B Delivery roller drive belt [AR-M161/AR-M162] CC E MCU PWB [AR-M161/AR-M162] CD E MCU PWB [AR-M165] CD E MCU PWB [AR-M206/AR-M207(U.S.A,Canada,Australia,New Zealand)] CG E MCU PWB [AR-M207 Europe] AC C Frame cover AL C Delivery left cover AE C Optical adjustment plate AB C Screw(410) AB C Screw(38) AA C Cable band AB C Harness ring AB C Screw(318) (200V series) AA N C Washer (200V series) AA N C Washer (200V series) AG C 3P terminal base (200V series) AH C AC harness (200V series) AN C PS harness AD C AC cord holder AC C Screw(430) AA C Screw(412) AA N C Washer AA N C Washer AH C IF-MCU harness AR C MCU fixing plate AL C Optical reinforce plate AC C Drive plate sheet [AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M206(South Africa)] AA N C Washer [AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M206(South Africa)] AC C Screw(38) AC C MCU edge protect sheet AS B Interlock switch unit AC C Interlock switch maintenance sheet AE C Interlock switch fixing plate AB C Screw(29)
TR No.
Effective time
manuals4you.com
12-1
H Base plate unit 2

NO.
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 97 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 118 120 121 122 124 125 127 128 129 ! 501 !
PARTS CODE
XWHS720-04043 PSHEZ0448QSZZ RCORF0018QSZZ DHAI-0342QSZZ RCORF0018QSZZ PDUC-0006QSZ1 PFILZ0013QSZZ PSHEZ0496QSZZ PSHEZ0497QSZZ CPWBX0130QS34 LHLDW1009ACZZ LPLTM0315QSZZ DHAI-0329QSZZ DHAI-0330QSZZ PSHEZ0140QSZ1 TLABH0602QSZ1 XHBS730P08000 RMOTS0042QSZZ CPLTM0073QS01 NBRGC0529FCZZ NGERH0065QSZZ NGERH0064QSZZ XRESP40-06000 NGERH0075QSZZ NPLYZ0011QSZZ NBLTT0009QSZZ NBLTT0008QSZZ NPLYZ0008QSZZ PSHEZ0065QSZZ MSPRC1315FCZ1 XRESP40-06000 NGERH0066QSZZ CPLTM0103QS02 LHLDZ0110QSZZ DHAI-0403QSZZ TLABZ4868FCZZ LPLTM0360QSZZ VHI29L0800FQS VHI29L0800JQS VHI29L0800GQS TLABZ0530QSZZ RCORF0004QSZZ LBNDJ0037FCZ1 CDENC0015RS52 CDENC0015RS53
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AA N C Washer AA C Optical base plate bottom sheet B AR C Ferrite core AG C CCD harness AR C Ferrite core AF C Duct AR A Ozone filter AD C LSU harness protect sheet AB C MCU screw receive sheet IMC2 PWB [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ CD E AR-M207(Europe,Australia,New Zealand)] AA C Clamp ERDH fixing plate [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ AL C AR-M207(Europe)] IMC IN harness [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ AD C AR-M207(Europe)] IMC OUT harness [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ AD C AR-M207(Europe)] AE C 3P terminal base sheet (200V series) AB D USB-1 label AB C Screw(38) AT B DUP motor [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AM C DUP motor fixing plate [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AD C Bearing [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AC C Gear(21-28T) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AD C Gear pulley(40T24T) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AA C E type ring(E4) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AC C Gear(20T) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AC C Pulley [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AG B DUP driving belt(134) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AG B DUP roller driving belt [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AC C Pulley(S2M20T) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AB C Pulley flange sheet [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AD C Clutch spring A [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AA C E type ring(E4) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AD C Gear(17T) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AF C DUP driving idle plate [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AG C Connector holder AG C NWAC I/F 1 harness AC D Ground label (200V series) AC C Earth plate AT B Flash ROM [AR-M161/AR-M162] AT B Flash ROM [AR-M165] AT B Flash ROM [AR-M206/AR-M207] USB2.0 display label [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ AB D AR-M207(Europe)] AF C Ferrite core (Except U.S.A,Canada,Hong Kong) AA C Cable band (Except U.S.A,Canada,Hong Kong) BV E Power supply unit(Without No.17) (120V series) BW E Power supply unit(Without No.17,122) (200V series)
TR No.
Effective time
12-2
H Base plate unit 2
87 20 127 2 20 13 85 1 5 3 13 125 35 C 13 35 13 52 D 31 67 10 8 10 7 13 122 10 11 12 18 16 40 61 3 13 13 13 15 13 21 15 13 14 70 23 29 68 72 71 124 15 26 26 73 24 13 15 27 13 15 39 100 35 13 35 15 13 66 13 66 13 54 56 57 29 15 57 53 A 22 56 55 25 41 42 129 50 48 46 47 27 73 15 65 104 103 64 28 101 128 97 15 36 30 10 15 69 15 15 81 60 28 32 121 13 82 120 9 6 78 77 19 A 17 7 13 10 3 D 13 37 35 44 84 35 13 33 35 45 76 75 13 13 20 83 20 20 35 84 35 C 86 58 74
501
49 18
105 102 107 101 106 43 110 13 118 107 108 109 27 111 15 115 113 110 112 114 15 115 116
PRP03042
manuals4you.com
12-3
Update : 06/03/27
I Manual paper feeding multi unit

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 42 43 45 46 47 48 51 52 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 501 502
PARTS CODE
PCOVP0098QSZZ MARMP0008QSZZ LPLTP0056QSZ3 XRESP40-06000 LBOSZ1510FCZZ PPIPP0109FCZZ PPIPP0109FCZ1 MSPRC1315FCZ1 XPSSJ20-07000 LBOSZ1508FCZZ LBSHZ0303FCZZ NSFTZ0069QSPZ MSPRT0091QSZZ NROLR0922FCZ2 NGERH0495FCZZ NGERH0061QSZZ MARMP0009QSZ1 NROLR1267FCZ1 XEBS730P10000 MARMP0041QSZZ MARMP0006QSZZ NSFTZ0017QSPZ MCAMP0001QSZZ MSPRC1316FCZ1 PPIPP0009QSZZ CPLTM0304QS02 MSPRD0092QSZZ NGERH0972FCZZ RPLU-0007QSZ1 MSPRC1318FCZ1 PTME-0179FCZZ PTME-0178FCZZ PTME-0178FCZ1 MSPRC2175FCZZ LFRM-0020QSE7 XBBS730P10000 PSHEZ0099QSZZ MSPRT0147QSZZ PSHEZ0241QSZZ XEBS730P08000 PGIDM0037QSEZ PGIDM0038QSEZ XEBS730P08000 LSOU-0009QSE2 NGERH0193FCZZ LSOU-0011QSE1 LSOU-0010QSE1 MARMP0005QSE1 XEBS730P08000 PGIDM0117QSZZ LSTPP0011QSZZ LBSHZ0006QSZZ NSFTZ0070QSPZ NCPL-0012QSZZ MSPRD0302QSZZ PSHEZ0410QSZZ LX-WZ0011QSZZ CFRM-0020RS57 CSOU-0009QS34
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AN C Multi frame cover AH C Stopper arm AD C Stopper plate AA C E type ring(E4) AF C Cam boss A1 AB C PF clutch pipe A 1 AC C PF clutch pipe A AD C Clutch spring A AA C Spring pin(2-7) AG C Cam boss A2 AC C M bushing C AN C Roller shaft F AC C Roller arm spring AR A Manual paper feed roller AC C Gear(20T) AD C Gear(24T) AF C Roller arm AH A Manual feed pick up roller AC C Screw(310) AE C Cam transmission arm AD C Arm AM C Manual feed cam shaft AF C Drive cam AE C Clutch spring B AD C Cam clutch sleeve AD C Paper feeding joint plate AE C MF earth spring AB C Gear(27T) AM B Multi feeding solenoid AA C Spring B AC C Manual paper feeding pawl B AC C Manual paper feeding pawl A 1 AC C Manual paper feeding pawl A AA C Pawl A spring AT C Multi feed frame AA N C Screw(310) AC C Vibration proof sheet AC C Stopper arm spring AB C Vibration proof sheet C AC C Screw(38) AF C MB side guide F AF C MB side guide R AC C Screw(38) AS D Multi feed tray 1-U AB C UC manual feed gear AL D Multi feed tray 2 AR D Multi feed tray 1-L AD C Tray arm AC C Screw(38) AH C Multi frame cover guide AC C Stopper AC C M bushing 2 AN C Roller shaft R AD C Manual feed coupling AC C Manual feed coupling spring AC C Manual feed protect sheet AB C Poly slider(5-12-0.5) BF E Manual paper feeding multi unit BA E Manual paper tray unit
TR No.
Effective time
06/04
06/04
13-1
Update : 06/03/27
I Manual paper feeding multi unit
501
18 60
18 1 2 65 64 35 3 61 62 6 22 5 4 24 5 28 29 30 45 46 34 52 47 4 66 38 27 25 38 63
13 8 14 16
12 10 61
11
87
23
4 10 26 42 41 43 43 43 43 51
21
19 17 15 37
4 20 67 36 32 31
33
52
51
48
502
PRP03043
manuals4you.com
13-2
J Delivery frame unit

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 64 71 73 77 78 79 80 87 901
PARTS CODE
XEBS730P08000 GCOV-0065QSZZ CPWBF0179QSE1 XEBS730P06000 PSPO-0030QSZZ NROLM0124QSZ1 MSPRT0229GCAZ NROLP0123QSZZ NKOM-0002QSZZ CPWBF0147QSF1 PBRSR0009QSZ1 PBRSR0005QSZZ XRESP50-06000 NBRGC0529FCZZ LPLTM0100QSZ1 NBRGY2122SCZZ LHLDZ0040QSZ2 XEBS730P14000 LBOSZ0048QSZ1 MLEVP0028QSE1 LPINS0001QSZZ NGERH0076QSZZ XRESP50-06000 NSFTZ0025QSP1 MCAMP0002QSZZ MLEVP0027QSZ1 MLEVP0110QSZZ MLEVP0106QSZ1 CPWBF0147QSF2 MSPRD0143QSZ1 NPLYZ0030QSZ1 NGERH0063QSZZ LPINS0258FCZZ NBRGC0019QSZZ XRESP40-06000 NGERH0070QSZZ XPSSJ20-10000 NBRGY2122SCZZ NROLP0038QSZZ LFRM-0027QSZ1 PFILZ0004QSZZ PMLT-0099QSZZ XEBS720P06000 NFANP0009QSZZ PDUC-0003QSZ1 PGIDM0062QSZ3 NROLP1122FCZZ PGIDM0040QSZ2 MSPRT0229GCAZ XEBS730P08000 CSFTZ0023QS02 MSPRD0144QSZZ XRESP40-06000 LSTPP0003QSZ1 MSPRT0107QSZZ NGERH0067QSZZ NGERH0068QSZ1 CPLTM0075QS02 RMOTS0040QSZZ XHBS830P05000 CPWBF0147QSE3 XRESP30-06000 DHAI-0480QSZZ NROLP0122QSZZ XHBS730P08000 DUNT-0513RSZZ DHAI-0489QSZZ LPLTM0147QSZZ LX-BZ7062XCPZ LPLTP0385QSZZ (Unit) CFRM-0027RS79 CFRM-0027RS77
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AC C Screw(38) AN C Delivery front side cover AX E Tray PWB AA C Screw(36) AC C Cushion AP C Delivery roller AC C FU spring R AH C Delivery follower roller B AC C Delivery collar AL E P-OUT sensor PWB AH B Discharge brush [AR-M161/AR-M162] AK B Discharge brush [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AA C E type ring(E5) AD C Bearing AD C Delivery earth plate B AB B Transport roller bearing 1 AS C Delivery roller holder AD N C Screw(314) AC C Separator lever boss AD C Separator lever F AA C Pin AD C Separator cam gear AA C E type ring(E5) AM C Separator drive shaft AE C Separator drive cam AD C Separator lever R AD C FULL detection lever AD C Delivery actuator AL E DUP sensor PWB AF C Delivery earth spring A AE C Delivery pulley [AR-M161/AR-M162] AD C Delivery drive gear(30T) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AA C Spring pin(3-8) AD C Bearing(6) AA C E type ring(E4) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AC C DUP delivery R gear(20T) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AA C Spring pin(2-10) [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AB B Transport roller bearing 1 [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AP C DUP delivery roller [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AV C Delivery frame AM A Ozone filter AC C Cooling fan cushion AC C Screw(26) AT B Cooling fan AG C Cooling fan duct AK D Delivery upper paper guide 20 AF C PS upper roller [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AK C Delivery lower paper guide AC C FU spring R [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207] AC C Screw(38) AH C Shiftier shaft AC C Delivery earth spring B AA C E type ring(E4) AC C Shiftier stopper AC C Shiftier return spring AD C Shiftier gear(24T) AD C Shiftier gear(50T) AG C Shiftier drive plate AR B Shiftier motor AA C Screw(35) AL E Shifter HP sensor PWB AA C E type ring(E3) AF C Delivery tray unit harness AH C Delivery follower roller A AB C Screw(38) AT E JOB separator minimum unit AC C JOB separator switch harness AD C Minimum sensor fixing plate AA C Screw AD C Delivery fixing plate BT BU E E Delivery frame unit SIMP Delivery frame unit DUP [AR-M161/AR-M162] [AR-M165/AR-M206/AR-M207]
TR No.
Effective time
14-1
J Delivery frame unit

1
2 1 64
3 4 73 10 4 C 22 28
27
22 18 20 25 26
17
24 60 59 60 50 50
B A 18 20 13 21 19 58
11
17
57 56 53
60 61 31 32 34 36 37 29 1 B 42 34 42 44 43 41 42 40 35 40 30
54 62 55
52 33
87 6 9 9 7 7 5 14 13 12 13 12 13 50 8 5 7 5 71 71 9 7 8 5 16 12 15
87
51
39
38
44
43 41 42 42
1 45 1 80 46 48 46 48
77 79 78 C
1 47 1 PRP03044
manuals4you.com
14-2
K TC case unit
NO.
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 901
PARTS CODE
XEBS730P08000 PGIDH0118QSZZ PSHEP0050QSZ1 PSHEP0051QSZZ LHLDZ0030QSZZ DWIR-0466CSZZ MSPRT0513FCZ1 PSHEP0052QSZZ LHLDZ0032QSZZ QSLP-0009QSZZ PCASZ0013QSZZ LHLDZ0031QSZ4 QSLP-0008QSZZ PGIDM0032QSZZ XEBS730P06000 PSHEZ0125QSZZ PSHEZ0434QSZZ DUNTK0233QSPZ XBPSC30P06K00 PSHEZ0435QSZ1 PSPAZ0040QSZZ (Unit) CHLDZ0030RS55
Inter- PRICE NEW PART change RANK MARK RANK AC C Screw(38) AK C TC front guide AD C TC sheet AB C TC cover sheet F AD C TC holder F BE B Charger wire AA C MC tension spring AB C TC cover sheet R AD C TC holder R AD C TC electrode plate AP C TC case AH C Discharge holder AD C BC electrode plate AE C Separator guide AA C Screw(36) AE C Discharge delivery sheet AC C TC case sheet AH N E Resistor unit transfer AA C Screw(36K) AA C Guide sheet AB C Front guide spacer AY E TC unit
DESCRIPTION
TR No.
Effective time
K TC case unit
23
1 9 8 17
2 3 23 7 5 1 17 6 24 12
20 10 22 11 21
1 13
14
19
manuals4you
1
.com
16
PRP03045
15-1
L 250 sheets tray unit

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 901
PARTS CODE
LPLTM0364QSZZ PSHEZ0441QSZZ LHLDW1226FCZZ LPLTM2642FCG2 PGIDM0122QSZZ PTME-0027QSZ2 XRESP40-06000 TLABH0064QSZ1 PGIDM0123QSZZ PTME-0028QSZ2 MSPRC0334QSZZ XEBS730P08000 XWHS730-08100 NGERH0193FCZZ MSPRC0152QSZZ MSPRC1145FCZZ LSTPP0161FCZZ GCASP0007QSZ1 TTAG-0009QSZZ JHNDP0007QSZZ XEBS740P10000 LPLTP0368QSZZ (Unit) CCASP0007RS52
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AR C Rotation plate AD C Rotation plate sheet AB C Turn fastener AD C Tray rear plate AL C Guide F AL C 250 tray pawl F AA C E type ring(E4) AC D Indicator label AL C Guide R AL C 250 tray pawl R AD C Tray spring AC C Screw(38) AA C Washer AB C UC manual feed gear AB C Tray drawer lower spring D AA C Stopper spring AB C Rotation plate stopper AY D Tray case AC D Tray rotation tag AS C Cassette panel AA C Screw(410) AD C Cassette position block BL E 250 sheets tray unit
TR No.
Effective time
L 250 sheets tray unit
3 9 19 1 2 2 5 8 7 6 4 11 21 12 13 21 14 15 10
18
16
17 20 22 PRP03046
manuals4you.com
16-1
Update : 2006/04/28
M Packing material & Accessories

NO.
2 3 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 18 19
PARTS CODE
SPAKA0464QSZZ SPAKA0603QSZZ SSAKZ0003QSZZ SPAKA0134QSZZ TCADZ0010QSZZ LX-BZ0015QSPZ LHLDW1226FCZZ TTAG-0009QSZZ CCLEZ0005RS51 SPAKA0466QSZZ SSAKA3001CCZZ SPAKA0465QSZZ SSAKA2343QCZZ TLABH0078QSZ1 TLABH0068QSZ1 TLABH0069QSZ2 TLABH0065QSZ2 CCASZ0067FC01 CDSKA0072QS33 CDSKA0089QS33
20
21
22
23
24 101
CDSKA0078QS31 TINSE1333QSZ1 TINSE1335QSZZ TINSE1415QSZ1 TINSE1335QSZ1 TINSE1334QSZ1 TINSG1336QSZZ TINSG1336QSZ1 TINSE1507QSZZ TINSG1508QSZZ TINSE1337QSZZ CPNLH0048QS01 CPNLH0048QS03 CPNLH0049QS01 TINSE1334TSZZ TINSS1344TSZZ TINSF1345TSZZ TINSI1346TSZZ TINSH1347TSZZ TINSW1348TSZZ TINSZ1349TSZZ TINSZ1350TSZZ TINSD1351TSZZ TINSP1352TSZZ TINSE1456TSZZ TINSS1463TSZZ TINSF1462TSZZ TINSI1464TSZZ TINSH1465TSZZ TINSW1466TSZZ TINSZ1469TSZZ TINSZ1468TSZZ TINSD1467TSZZ TINSP1362TSZZ SSAKA2341QCZZ TLABH4259FCZZ
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AV D Top packing cushion R AY D Top packing cushion LA AF D Vinyl bag AE D OC protect sheet [AR-M161/AR-M162/AR-M165] AC D Fixing screw caution card AF C 2nd,3rd fixing screw AB C Turn fastener AC D Tray rotation tag AQ D Charger cleaner AG D Scanner reinforcement material AA D Vinyl bag(140260mm) BE D Bottom case AA D Vinyl bag(260380mm) AE D Magnification select label (Inch series) AF D Magnification select label (AB series) AG D Size display label (Inch series) AG D Size display label (AB series) AD D Maintenance card CD-ROM [AR-M161/AR-M162(U.S.A,Canada)/AR-M206/ AM D AR-M207(U.S.A,Canada)] CD-ROM [AR-M162(Australia,New Zealand)/AR-M165/ BB D AR-M207(Europe,Australia,New Zealand)] BB D CD-ROM(IE) AU D Operation manual(COPY) (ENGLISH[U.S.A]) BA D Operation manual(COPY) (ENGLISH[U.kingdom]) BA D Operation manual(COPY) (ENGLISH[Hong Kong]) 1 BA D Operation manual(COPY) (ENGLISH[U.kingdom]) BA D Operation manual(COPY) (ENGLISH[Other Countries]) BB D Operation manual(COPY) (GERMAN) 1 BB D Operation manual(COPY) (GERMAN) AP D Operation manual(SETUP) (ENGLISH) AY D Operation manual(SETUP) (GERMAN) AK D Operation manual(KEY) (ENGLISH[U.S.A]) AY D Key sheet (ENGLISH) AV D Key sheet (FRENCH) BD D Key sheet [AR-M162](FRENCH) Operation manual(COPY) (ENGLISH) N D Operation manual(COPY) (SPANISH) N D Operation manual(COPY) (FRENCH) N D Operation manual(COPY) (ITALIAN) N D Operation manual(COPY) (DUTCH) N D Operation manual(COPY) (SWEDISH) N D Operation manual(COPY) (NORWEGIAN) N D Operation manual(COPY) (FINNISH) N D Operation manual(COPY) (DANISH) N D Operation manual(COPY) (PORTUGUESE) N D Operation manual(Setup) (ENGLISH) N D Operation manual(Setup) (SPANISH) N D Operation manual(Setup) (FRENCH) N D Operation manual(Setup) (ITALIAN) N D Operation manual(Setup) (DUTCH) N D Operation manual(Setup) (SWEDISH) N D Operation manual(Setup) (NORWEGIAN) N D Operation manual(Setup) (FINNISH) N D Operation manual(Setup) (DANISH) N D Operation manual(Setup) (PORTUGUESE) N D AA D Vinyl bag(230340mm) AH D Display label (Hong Kong)
TR No.
Effective time
06/07
06/07
17-1
Update : 2006/04/28
M Packing material & Accessories
2 3 13 19 20 9 8 14 5 7
11 12
10
18
22
21
23
PRP03047
24
manuals4you.com
17-2
N 2nd Tray exteriors [AR-M206/AR-M207]

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
PARTS CODE
GCOV-0020QSE1 GGAD-0001QSZZ GGAD-0002QSZZ LSUPP0083FCZZ LPLTM0116QSZZ XEBS740P12000 GCOV-0019QSZ2 PGIDM0049QSE2 PGIDM0048QSE2 MSPRC0141QSZZ MLOKZ0001QSZZ NGERH1169FCZZ PRNGP0019FCZZ DHAI-0326QSZZ CPWBF0019QSE7 MSPRD0135QSZZ GLEGG0064FCZZ PGIDM0050QSE1 MARMP0015QSZZ NROLP1060FCZZ MSPRT0129QSZ1 GCOV-0021QSE2 LPLTM0113QSZ1 XEPS730P08X00 XHBS730P14000 LPLTM0135QSZZ LPLTM0138QSZZ PSHEZ0172QSZZ PSHEZ0173QSZZ PSPO-0008QSZZ PSPO-0009QSZZ PSPO-0010QSZZ PSPO-0011QSZZ PSPO-0014QSZZ PSHEZ0171QSZZ LHLDW3142KCZZ XHBS740P10000
manuals4you.com
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AQ D Rear cover AE C Edge guard upper AE C Edge guard lower AB C PWB supporter(LCBS-3) AQ C Joint plate R AA C Screw(412) AT D Front cover BA D Guide L BB D Guide R AB C Transport PG lock spring AC C Transport PG lock AF C Joint gear AA C V ring(GTW-6) AM C CAS harness AV E 1st tray interface PWB AD C Joint earth spring AC C Rubber foot AM D 1st transport paper guide AD C 1st door arm AF C U-turn roller AC C Follower roller spring AP D 1st right cover AH C Guide R joint plate AA N C Screw(38X) AA N C Screw(314) AF C 2nd joint earth plate AD C 2nd joint earth plate left rear AB C Front sheet 2 AB C Right cover sheet AC C Rear cover cushion 1 AD C Rear cover cushion 2 AD C Guide R cushion F AD C Guide R cushion R AG C Right cover cushion 3 AD C Front sheet 1 AC C Cable holder AA C Screw(410)
TR No.
Effective time
(Europe) (Europe) (Europe) (Europe) (Europe) (Europe) (Europe) (Europe)
N 2nd Tray exteriors [AR-M206/AR-M207]

42 36 7 7 31 7 7 4 35 2 7 5 27 11 13 9 7 10 27 37 11 8 7 7 20 40 22 23 22 19 21 12 41 16 34 19 12 14 15 28 3 7 18 38 1 42
33 25 7 7 34 39
23 21
30 7
24 PRP03048
18-1
Update : 06/03/27
O 2nd Tray paper feeding unit [AR-M206/AR-M207]

NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 38 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 52 53 54 57 58 59 60 61 62 501 502 503
PARTS CODE
NGERH1207FCZZ MARMP0229FCZZ MSPRT0128QSZZ XRESP50-06000 LBOSZ1031FCZZ MSPRC0161QSZZ PPIPP0007QSZZ NGERH1132FCZZ NBRGM0501FCZZ DHAI-0075QSZ1 NROLP0044QSP2 VHPGP1A71A1-1 RPLU-0012QSZ1 NBRGC0188FCZZ XRESP40-06000 LBOSZ1510FCZZ PPIPP0109FCZZ PPIPP0109FCZ1 MSPRC1315FCZ1 LPINS0181FCZZ LBOSZ1508FCZZ QSW-B0017QSZZ MSPRD0134QSZ2 NGERH0041QSZZ NGERH0990FCZZ PTME-0017QSZZ MSPRT0130QSZ1 PTME-0016QSZZ RPLU-0013QSZ1 XBBS730P06000 MLEVP0039QSZ1 MLEVP0046QSZZ LFRM-0031QSE3 LPLTM0137QSZZ LX-WZ0314FCZZ MSPRC0157QSZZ NBRGC0529FCZZ PPIPP0011QSZZ XBBS730P06000 RCORF0006QSZZ XWHS760-10000 MSPRD0156QSZZ PSPO-0005QSZZ PSPO-0007QSZZ NSFTZ0067QSPZ LHLDR0095QSZZ XEBS730P12000 PCLR-0011QSZZ LBRCR0011QSZZ PGUMM0013QSZZ CFRM-0031RS5K CFRM-0031RS5L CSFTZ0067RS53 CGUMM0013RS51
Inter- PRICE NEW PART DESCRIPTION change RANK MARK RANK AF C Joint gear(40T) AE C Joint arm AB C Joint arm spring AA C E type ring(E5) AC C Clutch boss AF C Clutch spring AD C Clutch sleeve AH C Clutch gear(29T) AB C Bearing(B-F6-7) AR C 1st harness AQ B 1st transport roller AG B Photo sensor(GP1A71A1) AM B Paper feeding solenoid AB C PF bearing AA C E type ring(E4) AF C Cam boss A1 AB C PF clutch pipe A 1 AC C PF clutch pipe A AD C Clutch spring A AA C Spring pin AG C Cam boss A2 AF B Tray detect switch AC C Paper feeding earth spring AF C 2ND gear ID(18T/26T) AB C Gear(16T) AD C Paper feeding clutch pawl AB C Clutch pawl spring AD C Transport clutch pawl AM B Transport solenoid AC C Screw(36) AE C PPDI actuator AD C CICS actuator AU C Paper feeding frame AD C Boss reinforce plate AA C Poly slider AC C Brake spring AD C Bearing AC C Brake sleeve AC C Screw(36) AL C Core AA N C Washer AB C PPDIACT spring AA C Clutch pawl cushion AB C Transport clutch pawl cushion AP C Paper feed roller shaft AD C Paper feed roller holder AC C Screw(312) AC C Roller collar AD C Paper feed roller bracket AG C Paper feed roller rubber Paper feeding unit BK E [AR-M206/AR-M207(U.S.A,Canada,Australia,New BK E Paper feeding unit AW E Paper feeding shaft AN E Paper feed roller rubber unit
TR No.
Effective time
06/04
(Europe) (Europe)
Zealand)] [Europe]
manuals4you.com
19-1
Update : 06/03/27
O 2nd Tray paper feeding unit [AR-M206/AR-M207]
1 2 10 47 3 6 9 18 8 9 47 15 13 43 4 16 53 7 5
18 21 18 19 20 22
18 23
41 27 30 29 46
26 28
45 48
42 4
15
31
32 33
54
44 34 35 62 17 38 4 15 36 62 58 61 58 59 59 52 61
502 503
60 57
501
503
60
PRP03049
19-2
COPYRIGHT 2006 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted. In any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of the publisher.
SHARP CORPORATION Digital Document System Group CS Promotion Center Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2006 May Printed in Japan t
manuals4you.com

Sharp AR-M207, AR-M165, AR-M162 Parts & Service

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Sharp AR-M207, AR-M165, AR-M162 Parts & Service

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

CODE : 00ZARM207/A1E

AR-M207 With the RSPF installed

AR-M207 AR-M165 AR-M162

8" (20 cm)

8" (20 cm)

8" (20 cm)

AR-M207 M165 M162 GENERAL 1-1

Job separator (AR-TR4)

Network Box (AR-NB3)

2 X 250 sheet paper feed unit (AR-D25)

250 sheet paper feed unit (AR-D24)

AR-M207 OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT STD*1

AR-M165 OPT OPT STD OPT OPT OPT STD

AR-M162 NO OPT STD OPT OPT OPT STD*1

*1 Option for USA,CANADA.

AR-NB3 AR-FX11 AR-SM5 AR-MM9 AR-PF1 AR-PK1N AR-PF2

OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT

OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT

OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT

The AR-NB3 is required The AR-NB3 is required The AR-NB3 is required

AR-M207 M165 M162 GENERAL 1-2

(6) Job Speed

(2) Engine speed

(7) Continuous copying

(8) Engine composition

(3) Print performance

Developing system Dry 2-component magnetic brush development

Separation system (-)DC scorotron

(4) Copy speed(cpm)

(9) Engine resolution

A5/5.5"x8.5" 20 20 16/15 12 12 11/10/ 11

(5) First copy time

AR-M207 M165 M162 SPECIFICATIONS 2-1

(11) Document table

(13) Operation panel

Left side document guide

Back side document guide(Bookmark)

AB and inch can be switched to each other by Sim.

c. Characters used in LCD Kind Dot ROM font 6(W)x 12(H)

(14) Controller board

(15) Paper feed section

AR-M207 M165 M162 SPECIFICATIONS 2-2

(18) Paper exit section

Paper size setting Paper size setting

Paper size setting when shipping

(19) Exposure(Print density)

(20) Void width

(16) Manual paper feed section

(22) Copy magnification ratio

(23) Power source

Paper size detection Paper empty detection

(24) Power consumption

Power consumption in operation

AR-M207 M165 M162 SPECIFICATIONS 2-3

(25) Environment support

(31) Printer basics

First Print Resolution Duplex print Shifter

(27) Ozone & dust

(28) External dimensions

PnP Support Software ROPM WHQL

(32) Scanner basics

(29) Occupying area

Protocol Interface Scanner utility